Panasonic DIGA DMR ES30V User Manual

d
e
art  
t
s
g
tin  
Ge  
Operating Instructions  
k
c
ba  
ay  
Pl  
DVD Recorder  
Model No. DMR-ES30V  
g
in  
rd  
o
c
Re  
D
DV  
g
tin  
Ed  
nt  
s
n
e
i
n
tio  
nc  
nve  
fu  
Co  
k
c
ba  
y
a
Pl  
g
n
i
S
rd  
o
c
VH  
Re  
nt  
s
n
e
i
n
tio  
nc  
nve  
fu  
Co  
g
)
n
i
r
ng  
er  
bi  
sf  
ub  
n
D
(
If you have any questions contact  
In the U.S.A: 1-800-211-PANA(7262)  
Dear Customer  
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum performance  
and safety, please read these instructions carefully.  
In Canada:  
1-800-561-5505  
e
nc  
For U.S.A. only  
The warranty can be found on page 73.  
e
r
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read  
the instructions completely.  
e
f
Re  
Please keep this manual for future reference.  
For Canada only  
The warranty can be found on page 74.  
l
La guía rápida en español se encuentra en la página 77–83.  
ño  
pa  
s
E
VQT0N92  
P PC  
 
Getting started  
d
e
art  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
t
s
g
Read these operating instructions carefully before using the unit. Follow the safety instructions on the unit and the applicable safety  
instructions listed below. Keep these operating instructions handy for future reference.  
tin  
Ge  
(1) Read these instructions.  
(2) Keep these instructions.  
(3) Heed all warnings.  
(10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched  
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point  
where they exit from the apparatus.  
(4) Follow all instructions.  
(5) Do not use this apparatus near water.  
(11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the  
manufacturer.  
(6) Clean only with dry cloth.  
(7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with  
the manufacturer’s instructions.  
(12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or  
table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with  
the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution  
when moving the cart/apparatus combination to  
avoid injury from tip-over.  
(8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat  
registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that  
produce heat.  
(9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-  
type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than  
the other. A grounding-type plug has two blades and a third  
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided  
for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet,  
consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.  
(13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or  
when unused for long periods of time.  
(14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is  
required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way,  
such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been  
spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus  
has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate  
normally, or has been dropped.  
Precautions for installation  
Useful features  
You can enjoy both DVD and VHS with the unit.  
Do not place the unit on  
amplifiers or equipment  
that may become hot.  
The heat can damage the unit.  
This DVD Recorder can record images and sounds in high quality to  
rapid random access capable DVD media. This has resulted in many  
new features that outperform older tape formats. The following  
information summarizes a few of these features.  
ª DVD  
Progressive output (l 15, 19)  
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.  
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the  
unit.  
If you connect the unit with a progressive output-compatible TV, you  
can enjoy higher-quality and less-flicker images than conventional  
TVs (of the interlace output type) can present.  
Finalize (l 31)  
This function enables you to play recorded DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-  
Video format) and +R on other players.  
Cautions as to condensation  
Condensation can cause unreliable playback of VHS recordings.  
Condensation may form in the following cases,  
Instant play (l 33)  
The unit is brought from cold surroundings into a well-heated room.  
The unit is suddenly brought from cool surroundings, such as an  
air-conditioned room or car, to a place which is hot and humid.  
During the rainy season.  
This function can quickly find and play a video program you wish to  
watch. Direct Navigator guides you to the beginning of a previously  
recorded video immediately.  
In any of the above-mentioned conditions, do not operate the unit for  
at least 2 hours. The unit is not equipped with a dew sensor.  
Quick view (l 21)  
This function allows you to watch news, information and other  
programs in a short time.  
Other precautions for installation  
The unit should not be installed or operated near large magnets or  
electromagnetic devices. Such devices can damage pre-recorded  
VHS recordings.  
Do not place any heavy objects atop the unit, and do not install it in  
a confined space. Please allow for adequate air circulation.  
The unit should not be mounted in a vertical position. It’s designed  
to operate in the horizontal position.  
Chasing play (l 27)  
There is no need to wait until recording is complete. Without stopping  
recording, you can play the video currently being recorded from its  
beginning.  
Instant recording (l 25)  
You no longer need to search for empty disc space. By pressing the  
recording button, the unit finds available recording space and begins  
recording right away.  
About descriptions in these operating  
instructions  
Pages to be referred to are indicated as (l ±±).  
The explanations concerning discs are indicated by [DVD], and  
those concerning video are indicated by [VHS].  
Simultaneous recording and play (l 27)  
With this function, you can play a previously recorded video program  
while recording another program.  
Time slip (l 22, 27)  
This function enables you to jump to the scene you specify during  
play and also while recording.  
One touch transfer (dub) (l 57, 59)  
This function can copy video from VHS to DVD and vice versa.  
ª VHS  
Long recording (l 51)  
With this function, you can record approx. 10 hours of video onto a T-  
120 cassette, for example.  
3
VQT0N92  
         
Contents  
Specifying the time when recording will stop..................................26  
Chasing play ............................................................................27  
The unit’s display......................................................................12  
- Other antenna connections to the unit...................................14  
- To enjoy multi-channel surround sound on DVD-Video  
STEP 2 Plug-in Auto Tuning..........................................................16  
Channel captions......................................................................18  
When other Panasonic products respond to  
- View Chapters.......................................................................35  
Entering a password (Ratings) .......................................................42  
Summary of settings.......................................................................43  
Clock Settings ................................................................................46  
- Set Clock Automatically.........................................................46  
- Adjust Time Zone ..................................................................46  
- Set Clock Manually................................................................46  
FUNCTIONS window .....................................................................47  
Status displays ...............................................................................47  
Changing the information displayed.........................................47  
Display examples.....................................................................47  
Removing Interference.............................................................20  
Selecting an amount of time to skip — Time Slip.........................22  
Create chapters ..............................................................................22  
Changing audio during play............................................................23  
Playing discs which contain both MP3 and still pictures.................23  
Using menus to play MP3 discs......................................................23  
Using the tree screen to find a group .......................................24  
To show JPEG Menu......................................................................24  
- Playing a still picture ..............................................................24  
- Start Slide Show/Slide Interval...............................................24  
- To select the still pictures in another folder............................24  
4
VQT0N92  
 
e
t
Jet Search.......................................................................................49  
Vertical locking adjustment.......................................................50  
Conexión a los terminales COMPONENT VIDEO IN......................................77  
Reproducción de los discos ...........................................................78  
Grabación temporizada..................................................................81  
Specifying the time when recording will stop............................51  
Reproducción  
Reproducción de un cassette de vídeo..........................................82  
Grabación  
Grabación de programas televisivos..............................................83  
Grabación temporizada..................................................................83  
Uso del sistema VCR Plus+.....................................................83  
Programación manual..............................................................83  
Controle, cambie o borre el programa .....................................83  
Common procedures................................................................54  
Auto Bilingual Choice Function.......................................................55  
Transfer (Dubbing) from DVD.........................................................59  
One Touch Transfer (dubbing) (DVD l VHS) .........................59  
Troubleshooting guide ....................................................................67  
Common...................................................................................67  
DVD..........................................................................................70  
VHS..........................................................................................71  
Product Service ..............................................................................72  
Product information ..................................................................72  
Limited Warranty (ONLY FOR U.S.A.) ...........................................73  
Limited Warranty (ONLY FOR CANADA).......................................74  
Specifications..................................................................................75  
Index...............................................................................................76  
5
VQT0N92  
Getting started  
Concerning discs  
Discs you can use for recording and play [12 cm (5z)/8 cm (3z)]  
Disc type  
Logo  
DVD-RAM  
4.7 GB/9.4 GB, 12 cm  
(5z)  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
rR  
(DVD-Video format)  
4.7 GB, 12 cm (5z)  
1.4 GB, 8 cm (3z)  
(DVD-Video format)  
4.7 GB, 12 cm (5z)  
1.4 GB, 8 cm (3z)  
4.7 GB, 12 cm (5z)  
2.8 GB, 8 cm (3z)  
Indicated in these  
instructions with  
[-R] before finalization  
[-RW‹V›] before finalization [+R] before finalization  
[RAM]  
[DVD-V] after finalization  
[DVD-V] after finalization  
[DVD-V] after finalization  
Main use  
Re-writable discs  
One time recording discs Re-writable discs  
(recordable until the disc  
is full)  
One time recording discs  
(recordable until the disc  
is full)  
Maximum recording time  
Play on other player  
Approx. 8 hours  
(Approx. 16 hours on a  
double-sided disc°)  
Approx. 8 hours  
Approx. 8 hours  
Approx. 8 hours  
Only on DVD-RAM  
compatible players. It is  
not necessary to finalize  
the disc. (l 64)  
Only after finalizing the  
disc. (l 31, 64)  
Only after finalizing the  
disc. (l 31, 64)  
Only after finalizing the  
disc. (l 31, 64)  
What you can do on this unit  
(Y: Possible, t: Impossible)  
Chasing playback  
Y
t
t
t
t
t
t
Recording broadcasts that  
allow one copy  
Y
(CPRM (l 64)  
compatible discs only)  
Recording both Main and  
SAP of MTS broadcast  
Y
Y
t
t
t
Only one is recorded.  
(l 44, Select MTS)  
Only one is recorded.  
(l 44, Select MTS)  
Only one is recorded.  
(l 44, Select MTS)  
Recording 16:9 aspect  
picture  
t
t
t
(The picture is recorded in (The picture is recorded in (The picture is recorded in  
4:3 aspect.)  
4:3 aspect.)  
4:3 aspect.)  
Entering text  
Erasing titles  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
(Available space does not (Disc space increases  
(Available space does not  
increase after erasing.)  
increase after erasing.)  
only when the last  
recorded title is erased.)  
Creating playlists  
Y
t
t
t
° You cannot consecutively record or play both sides.  
We recommend using Panasonic discs. We recommend using DVD-RAM discs with cartridges to protect them from scratches and dirt.  
Discs from other manufactures may not be recorded or played due to the condition of the recording.  
You may not be able to record to DVD-R, DVD-RW and +R discs on this unit or play them due to the condition of the recording.  
You cannot record programs that allow “One time only recording” to CPRM compatible DVD-R and DVD-RW on this unit. You can record  
other programs as DVD-Video format.  
You can use high speed recording compatible discs on this unit.  
DVD Video Recording format  
This is a recording method which allows you to record and edit TV  
DVD-Video format  
This recording method is the same as commercially available  
broadcasts and so on.  
DVD-Video.  
Digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” can be  
recorded to a CPRM compatible disc. You can record to CPRM  
compatible DVD-RAM on this unit.  
Play is only possible on a compatible DVD player.  
Use a DVD-RAM to record in DVD Video Recording format.  
Digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot  
be recorded.  
These can be played on a DVD player. However programs  
recorded on this unit must be finalized to be played on other  
DVD players.  
Use a DVD-R or DVD-RW to record in DVD-Video format.  
6
VQT0N92  
       
Getting started  
d
e
Play-only discs [12 cm (5z)/8 cm (3z)]  
art  
t
s
g
Disc type  
DVD-Video  
DVD-Audio DVD-RW  
(DVD Video Recording format)  
rRW  
Audio CD  
Video CD  
tin  
Logo  
Ge  
Indicated in these  
instructions with  
[DVD-V]  
[DVD-A]  
[-RW‹VR›]  
[DVD-V]  
+RW°  
[CD]  
Recorded CD-R° and  
[VCD]  
Instructions  
High quality  
movie and  
music discs  
High fidelity  
music discs  
DVD-RW° recorded on another  
DVD recorder  
Recorded  
recorded on audio and CD-RW° with music and  
Played on You can play programs that allow another  
music  
music  
video  
this unit in 2 “One time only recording” if they DVD  
(including recorded in  
(including  
CD-R/  
RW°)  
channels  
have been recorded to a CPRM recorder  
compatible disc.  
CD-R/  
RW°)  
MP3 (l 23)  
Still pictures  
(JPEG and  
TIFF)  
By formatting (l 31) the disc,  
you can record to it in DVD-Video  
format and play it on the unit.  
recorded on  
CD-R/RW°  
It may be necessary to finalize the disc on the  
equipment used for recording.  
° Play may be impossible on some DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format), +RW, CD-R or CD-RW discs due to the condition of the  
recording.  
You can play still pictures (JPEG/TIFF), CD-DA, Video CD and MP3 format data recorded on CD-R/RW. Close the session or finalize the  
disc after recording.  
The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating  
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.  
Note about using a DualDisc  
The digital audio content side of a DualDisc does not meet the technical specifications of the Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) format so  
play may not be possible.  
Regarding DVD-Audio  
Region number supported by this unit  
Some multi-channel DVD-Audio will prevent down-mixing (l 64)  
of all or part of their contents if this is the manufacturer’s  
intention. Tracks that are prevented from being down-mixed will  
not play properly on this unit (e.g. audio is played from the front  
two channels only). Refer to the disc’s jacket for more  
information.  
Region numbers are allocated to DVD players and DVD-Video  
according to where they are sold.  
The region number of this unit is “1”.  
The unit will play DVDs marked with labels containing “1” or  
ALL”.  
Example:  
1
2
1
ALL  
4
Discs that cannot be played  
Concerning logo marks  
2.6/5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm (5z)  
3.95/4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring  
Dolby Digital (l 44)  
This is a method of coding digital signals  
DVD-R recorded in DVD Video Recording format  
DVD-R (DVD-Video format), DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R  
recorded on another unit and not finalized (l 64, Finalize)  
PAL discs (you can still play the audio on DVD-Audio)  
DVD-Video with a region number other than “1” or “ALL”  
Blu-ray  
developed by Dolby Laboratories. Not only stereo  
(2 channel) audio, these signals can also be multi-  
channel audio. A large amount of audio  
information can be recorded on one disc by this  
method.  
DVD-ROM, DVD-R DL, +R DL, +R 8cm (3z), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-  
G, Photo CD, CVD, SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, DivX Video Disc,  
etc.  
DTS Digital Surround (l 44)  
This surround system is used in many movie  
theaters around the world. The separation  
between channels is good and the compression  
ratio is low, so realistic sound effects are possible.  
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a problem  
with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent damage caused  
by such loss.  
Examples of causes of such losses are  
A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company.  
A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit.  
A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this unit.  
7
VQT0N92  
             
Getting started  
Disc handling  
Inserting discs  
How to hold a disc  
Do not touch the recorded surface.  
[1] Press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to  
open the tray.  
You can insert a cartridge or non-cartridge disc.  
[2] Press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to  
close the tray.  
If you insert a DVD-RAM with the write-protect tab set to  
“PROTECT” (l 30), play starts automatically.  
Concerning non-cartridge discs  
Be careful about scratches and dirt.  
Note  
A double-sided disc should be loaded with the side you want to  
record/play facing down.  
It is not possible to record continuously from one side of a double-  
sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it  
over.  
If there is dirt or condensation on the disc  
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.  
When using 8 cm (3q) DVD-RAM or 8 cm (3q) DVD-R, remove the  
disc from the cartridge.  
Non-cartridge disc  
Cartridge disc  
Handling precautions  
(1)  
(2)  
Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc  
warping and unbalanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)  
Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt  
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.  
Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static  
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.  
Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.  
Do not drop, stack, or cause impact to discs. Do not place objects  
on them.  
D
DV  
(3)  
Do not use the following discs:  
(1) Insert label-up.  
- Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels  
(rental discs etc.).  
(2) Insert fully so it clicks into place.  
(3) Insert label-up with the arrow facing in.  
- Discs that are badly warped or cracked.  
- Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart shapes.  
Maintenance  
The precision parts in the unit are readily affected by the  
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.  
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.  
To clean the unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.  
Never use alcohol, thinner or benzine to clean the unit.  
Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the  
instructions that came with the cloth.  
Do not place in the following areas:  
- In direct sunlight.  
- In very dusty or humid areas.  
- Near a heater.  
- Locations susceptible to significant differences in temperature  
changes (condensation can occur).  
- Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.  
To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases  
or cartridges when you are not using them.  
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and  
viewing pleasure.  
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, possibly  
making it impossible to record or play discs.  
Use the lens cleaner about once every year, depending on  
frequency of use and the operating environment.  
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.  
Lens cleaner: LF-K123LCA1 or RP-CL720 (On sale from May  
2005)  
When the unit is not to be used for a long time  
To save power, unplug it from the household AC outlet. The unit consumes a small amount of power even when it is turned off.  
Standby power consumption  
Front Display (l 45)  
Automatic  
Approx. 9 W  
Approx. 2 W  
Bright  
On  
Off  
Approx. 10 W  
Approx. 4 W  
Quick Start (l 43)  
Quick Start (l 43)  
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording on DVD-RAM°  
° From the power off state, recording on DVD-RAM starts about 1 second after first pressing the [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] and then  
sequentially pressing the [¥, REC] (Quick Start Mode).  
8
VQT0N92  
             
Getting started  
d
e
Using DVD-R, DVD-RW and +R on this unit  
art  
t
s
g
Restrictions with DVD-R, etc.°  
16:9 aspect programs are recorded in 4:3 aspect.  
Either Main or SAP can be recorded for MTS broadcasts.  
Playing the disc on other DVD players is not possible before finalizing.  
tin  
Ge  
° DVD-R, DVD-RW and +R are collectively referred to as “DVD-R, etc.” on this page.  
Main  
SAP  
The selected audio only is recorded.  
e.g., Main only  
Hello  
Hola  
Record to DVD-R, etc.  
Hello  
16:9 aspect program  
with Main and SAP  
4:3 aspect  
Therefore, follow the steps below when you use DVD-R, etc.  
When recording an SAP program to DVD-R, etc.  
Select the audio to record before recording or transferring (dubbing).  
Some television programs are broadcast in SAP (Secondary Audio Program). You have to select the audio recording type before recording or  
transferring (dubbing) them to DVD-R, etc.  
Select “Main” or “SAP” in “Select  
MTS” in the SETUP menu (l 44).  
Record to DVD-R, etc. The selected audio only is recorded.  
Main  
SETUP  
Main  
SAP  
Dynamic Range Compression  
Select MTS  
Off  
Main  
Hello  
Hello  
Hola  
Digital Audio Output  
Channel  
Setup  
Disc  
Video  
Audio  
Display  
Playing the disc on other DVD players  
The disc must be finalized after recording or transferring (dubbing) (l 31).  
It is necessary to finalize DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or transferring (dubbing) titles to them. You can then play them as a  
commercially sold DVD-Video. However the discs become play-only and you can no longer record or transfer (dub).°  
° You can record and transfer (dub) again if you format DVD-RW.  
Play on other DVD equipment  
Record to DVD-R, etc.  
Finalize  
CH  
AR  
SE  
ER  
ENT  
L
V
O
Y
PLA  
DIS  
NU  
ME  
T
OP  
N
TUR  
RE  
NU  
ME  
O
N
Í
/I  
Í
D
O
U
B
L
E
R
E
-
M
A
S
T
E
R
C
D
S
E
Q
U
E
N
T
I
A
L
DISC  
1
2
3
4
5
;
1
:/6  
5/9  
D
I
S
C
E
X
C
H
A
N
G
E
D
I
S
C
S
K
I
P
<OPEN/CLOSE  
F
OF  
DC  
IN  
9V  
EN  
OP  
D
UN  
RO  
UR  
A.S  
T
EA  
D
E
R
EP  
MO  
OR  
NIT  
MO  
E
E
M
OD  
TUR  
PIC  
9
VQT0N92  
 
Getting started  
Remote control  
(28)  
(27)  
[VHS] and [DVD] button  
[DVD]  
Before performing DVD operations, be sure to  
press the [DVD] button. Also, make sure the  
DVD indicator lights up on the unit.  
VHS  
CH  
DVD  
DVD/ VHS POWER  
TV  
REC  
POWER  
(1)  
[VHS]  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/ VIDEO  
Before performing VHS operations, be sure to  
press the [VHS] button. Also, make sure the  
VHS indicator lights up on the unit.  
VHS  
CH  
DVD  
(2)  
(3)  
REC  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
VHS  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
(1) Turn the unit on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 16  
(2) Input select (IN1, IN2, TP or DC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 63  
(3) Select drive (DVD or VHS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l above  
(4) Select channels and title numbers etc./Enter numbers  
(5) Cancel/Reset the tape counter  
(26)  
(4)  
(6) Basic operations for recording and play  
AUDIO  
(7) Show Top menu/Direct Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 23, 33  
(8) Selection/Enter, Frame-by-frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 16, 21  
(9) Show sub menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 24, 33, 37  
(10)Show scheduled recording list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 29, 53  
(11)Show on-screen menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 40  
(12)Start recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 25, 51, 58, 62, 63  
(13)Change recording mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 25, 51  
(14)One touch transfer (dub) (DVD, VHS ) . . . . . . . . .l 57, 59  
View select (A, B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 60  
(15)Create chapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 22  
(16)Select VCR/TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 20  
(17)Erase items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 22  
(18)Add/delete channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 17  
(19)Show status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 47, 55  
(20)Skip the specified time/  
(25)  
(24)  
(23)  
CANCEL/RESET  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
(5)  
(6)  
SLOW/  
SKIP/ INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
PLAY  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
(7)  
(8)  
(9)  
(22)  
(21)  
Display the TV image as a picture-in-picture  
Jet rewind button (JET REW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 22, 27, 49  
(21)Return to previous screen  
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
SUB MENU  
(22)Show FUNCTIONS window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 47  
Show VHS menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 54  
(23)Skip a minute forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 22  
(24)Show VCR Plusi screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 28, 52  
(25)Select audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 23, 25, 55  
(26)Channel select/  
TRACKING/V-LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 50  
(27)TV operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 19, 26, 51  
(28)Transmission window  
S
SCHEDULE  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
JET REW  
(10)  
(11)  
(12)  
(13)  
(14)  
(20)  
(19)  
(18)  
(17)  
(16)  
(15)  
REC  
REC MODE DVD ERASE ADD/DLT  
CREATE  
VCR/TV  
DUBBING  
CHAPTER  
VHS  
A
DVD  
B
Note  
Buttons such as the [¥, REC] button do not protrude as much as  
other buttons to stop them from being pressed accidentally.  
The word “button” is not used in these operating instructions so  
“Press the [ENTER] button.” is shown as “Press [ENTER].”  
You can use this remote control to operate your TV if you set the  
TV manufacturer code (l 19).  
10  
VQT0N92  
     
Getting started  
d
e
Batteries and remote control  
art  
t
About batteries  
How to use the remote control  
Aim at the sensor, avoiding obstacles, at a maximum range of 7 m  
(23 feet) directly in front of the unit.  
s
g
R6, AA, UM-3  
Insert so the poles (i and j) match  
those in the remote control.  
Do not use rechargeable type  
batteries.  
tin  
Ge  
Remote control signal sensor  
Do not:  
mix old and new batteries.  
use different types at the same  
time.  
20  
20  
heat or expose to flame.  
30  
take apart or short circuit.  
attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.  
use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.  
30  
7 m (23 feet) directly in front of the unit  
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can  
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.  
Note  
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long period  
of time. Store in a cool, dark place.  
Keep the transmission window and the unit’s sensor free from dust.  
Operation can be affected by strong light sources, such as direct  
sunlight, inverter fluorescent lamps, and the glass doors on  
cabinets.  
Note  
If you cannot operate the unit or TV using the remote control after  
changing the batteries, please re-enter the codes (l 19).  
Main unit  
Remote control signal sensor  
Cassette compartment  
Disc tray  
(1) [A]  
(2)  
(3) (4)  
(1)  
(2) [B] (3)  
POWER  
EJECT  
OPEN/CLOSE  
VHS  
CH  
DVD  
S
VIDEO IN  
CH  
REC  
REC  
DUBBING  
VIDEO IN  
L/MONO  
AUDIO IN  
R
VHS  
DVD  
IN2  
/k1.3  
The unit’s display  
[C]  
(5)(6)  
[D]  
(4) (5)  
Common to DVD/VHS  
DVD  
[A] DVD/VHS POWER on/off button (Í/I, POWER) . . . . . . . l 16  
To switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa.  
In the standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small  
amount of power.  
(1) Disc tray open/close button (<, OPEN/CLOSE) . . . . . . .l 8  
(2) DVD Channel up/down buttons (CH, W, X)  
(3) DVD Recording button (¥, REC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 25  
(4) DVD Stop button (). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 21  
(5) DVD Play/t1.3 button (1/t1.3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l 21  
[B] DVD/VHS drive indicator  
Lights when the DVD or VHS drive is selected.  
[C] IN2 input terminals (IN2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 63  
[D] One Touch Transfer (Dubbing) operation button  
From VHS to DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 57  
From DVD to VHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 59  
The unit automatically switches to standby when it has not been  
used for about 6 hours.  
You can turn this feature off or change the time to 2 hours.  
(l 43, “Off Timer”)  
VHS  
(1) Cassette eject button (<, EJECT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 48  
(2) VHS Search buttons (V/6, 5/W)  
(3) VHS Channel up/down buttons (CH, W, X) . . . . . . . . . . l 50  
(4) VHS Recording button (¥, REC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 51  
(5) VHS Stop button () . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 49  
(6) VHS Play button (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 49  
11  
VQT0N92  
       
Getting started  
The unit’s display  
Common to DVD/VHS  
DVD  
[A] Main display  
(1) Disc operation status  
(2) Disc type  
Current time  
VHS recording and play counter  
Scheduled recording start time  
Miscellaneous messages, etc.  
[B] Transfer (Dubbing) direction indicator  
[C] Main display  
(3) Recording mode indicator (l 25)  
XP SP LP EP (all on): FR mode (l 26)  
(4) Scheduled recording indicator ( ) (l 28)  
On:  
When a scheduled recording program is registered and a  
recordable disc is inserted.  
Flashes:  
Disc recording and play counter  
Scheduled recording end time  
Miscellaneous messages, etc.  
When it turns out that the unit cannot record a scheduled  
recording program (e.g. there is no disc, etc.) in the period  
between 2 minutes before the scheduled recording program  
starts and the end of the scheduled recording program.  
(5) Disc indicator  
VHS  
(1) Scheduled recording indicator ( ) (l 52)  
On:  
When a scheduled recording program is registered and  
recordable tape is inserted.  
(6) Channel position indicator  
TRK:  
GRP:  
TTL:  
PL:  
Track number  
Group number  
Title number  
Playlist number  
Channel  
Flashes:  
When it turns out that the unit cannot record a scheduled  
recording program (e.g. there is no tape, etc.) in the period  
between 2 minutes before the scheduled recording program  
starts and the end of the scheduled recording program.  
(2) Recording mode indicator (l 51)  
SP: When recording or playing in Normal mode.  
LP: When playing in Long play mode.  
EP: When recording or playing in Extra long play mode.  
VP: When recording or playing in 5-time (Long play) mode.  
(3) TV indicator  
CH:  
The indicator lights during the TV mode and it goes out during  
the VCR mode. You can switch the mode by using [VCR/TV].  
(l 20)  
(4) Remaining tape time indicator  
(5) Tape operation status  
The operation status of the unit, such as playback or fast-  
forward, is displayed.  
(6) Channel  
(7) Tape indicator  
Accessories  
Please check and identify the supplied accessories. Use numbers indicated in parentheses when asking for replacement parts.  
(Product numbers correct as of January 2005. These may be subject to change.)  
Only for U.S.A.: To order accessories, refer to “Accessory Purchases” on page 73.  
Only for Canada: To order accessories, call the dealer from whom you have made your purchase.  
1 AC power supply cord  
1 75 coaxial cable  
1 Remote control  
2 Batteries for the remote  
(K2CB2CB00006)  
(K2KZ2BA00001)  
(EUR7720KY0)  
control  
R6 size  
For use with the unit only.  
Do not use it with other  
equipment. Also, do not  
use cords belonging to  
other equipment with the  
unit.  
1 Audio/Video cable  
(U.S.A. only)  
Product Registration Card  
Please complete and return the included product registration  
card, or register via the Internet at:  
(K2KA6CA00001)  
12  
VQT0N92  
   
Getting started  
d
e
STEP 1 Connection  
art  
t
Please read “Precautions For Installation”. (l 3)  
s
g
Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.  
tin  
Ge  
Connecting a TV and VCR  
indicates included accessories.  
indicates accessories not included.  
Use a splitter if you also  
want to connect the  
Red  
antenna to your VCR.  
White  
Yellow  
Cable TV  
TV  
Connection (without Audio/Video cable)  
Connect in numerical order 1 to 3.  
The unit supplies a signal to the TV via the 75 coaxial  
cable on channel 3 or 4. It is possible to view the video  
Outdoor  
antenna  
AUDIO IN  
VHF/UHF  
RF IN  
picture on your TV in the same way that you watch TV  
VIDEO IN  
R
L
broadcasts.  
Indoor antenna  
After this connection, set the RF output channel “CH3”  
or “CH4” (l 16).  
Connection (with Audio/Video cable)  
Connect in numerical order 1 to 4.  
After this connection, set the RF output channel “OFF”  
(l 16).  
Antenna cable  
Splitter  
3
Audio/Video cable  
75 coaxial cable  
1
1
2
2
RF IN  
Y
P
B
PR  
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT  
R - AUDIO - L  
VIDEO  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
(480p/480i)  
S
VIDEO  
OPTICAL  
R - AUDIO - L  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
RF OUT  
R - AUDIO - L  
DVD OUT  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
VHF/UHF  
IN  
1
To IN1  
75 coaxial cable  
Cooling fan  
3
4
To house hold AC outlet  
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)  
Audio/Video cable  
Video cassette recorder  
AC power supply cord  
Connect to household AC outlet only  
after all other connections are complete.  
R
L
VIDEO  
VHF/UHF  
RF IN  
AUDIO OUT OUT  
If the antenna connector doesn’t match (l 14)  
Connection examples with other equipment  
Do not connect the unit through a video cassette  
recorder  
Amplifier (l 15)  
Video camera (l 63)  
Video signals sent through video cassette recorders will be affected  
by copyright protection systems and the picture will not be shown  
correctly on the TV.  
TV  
TV  
From the AUDIO/VIDEO OUT terminal  
or the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal  
The unit  
VCR  
VCR  
The unit  
The unit  
To IN2 input terminals (front)  
When connecting the unit to a TV with a built-in VCR, connect to  
the input terminals on the TV, not the VCR.  
For your reference  
The equipment connections described are examples.  
Peripheral equipment and optional cables are sold separately  
unless otherwise indicated  
.
13  
VQT0N92  
       
Getting started  
Connecting a cable TV box/satellite receiver  
You need to subscribe to a cable TV or satellite TV service to enjoy viewing their programming.  
Consult your service provider regarding appropriate cable TV box or satellite receiver.  
You can enjoy viewing cable TV or satellite TV programming.  
You can record and view scrambled and unscrambled channels  
simultaneously if connections are made as shown in the diagram  
below.  
TV  
To AUDIO/VIDEO IN  
To VHF/UHF RF IN  
To AUDIO/VIDEO IN  
Audio/Video cable  
To VHF/UHF RF IN  
Audio/Video cable  
TV  
The unit  
RF IN  
Y
P
B
PR  
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT  
R
R
-
-
AUDIO  
-
L
VIDEO  
RF IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
(480p/480i)  
S
VIDEO  
Y
P
B
PR  
OPTICAL  
R
-
AUDIO  
-
L
VIDEO  
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT  
R
-
AUDIO  
-
L
VIDEO  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
RF OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
(480p/480i)  
AUDIO  
-
L
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DVD OUT  
S
VIDEO  
IN  
1
VHF/UHF  
OPTICAL  
R
-
AUDIO  
-
L
VIDEO  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
RF OUT  
R
-
AUDIO  
-
L
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
The unit  
Cable TV box  
DVD OUT  
IN  
1
VHF/UHF  
75 coaxial cable  
Satellite receiver  
75 coaxial cable  
Cable TV  
box  
OUT  
IN  
or  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
2-way  
splitter  
From antenna or  
cable TV jack  
OUT2 OUT1  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
From satellite dish antenna  
Cable TV box  
From cable TV jack  
¢ For more information on connections (l 13)  
If the antenna connector does not match  
1 Other antenna connections to the unit  
1 Other antenna connections from the unit  
to the TV  
Use one of the following connections to suit your antenna lead.  
If your TV has both lead and coaxial VHF terminals, use the lead  
connection to minimize signal loss.  
Use one of the following connections to suit the antenna terminals on  
your TV. Refer to the TV’s operating instructions.  
A single twin lead  
from the antenna  
A twin lead and coaxial plug terminal  
300 to 75 ≠  
VHF  
UHF  
transformer  
VHF/UHF band separator  
75 coaxial cable  
(Flat) Twin lead  
300 cable  
To the unit’s  
RF IN terminal  
TV  
A twin lead and a coaxial cable  
A twin lead terminal  
from the antenna  
VHF  
or  
UHF  
VHF/UHF band mixer  
75 to 300 transformer  
(Flat) Twin lead 300 cable  
75 coaxial cable  
TV  
To the unit’s  
(Round)  
75 coaxial cable  
RF IN terminal  
2 twin lead terminals  
VHF/UHF band separator  
VHF  
UHF  
2 twin leads  
from the antenna  
75 coaxial cable  
TV  
VHF/UHF band mixer  
Multiple antenna terminals  
Connect to one of the ANT terminals, then change the TV’s setting  
(Flat) Twin lead 300 cable  
as necessary.  
To the unit’s  
TV  
RF IN terminal  
300 to 75 transformer  
Split out  
ANT 1  
75 coaxial cable  
ANT 2  
14  
VQT0N92  
           
Getting started  
d
e
Connecting an amplifier or system  
DVD output and DVD/VHS output  
art  
t
component  
The unit has DVD/VHS COMMON output terminals and DVD output  
terminals.  
s
g
1 To enjoy multi-channel surround sound on  
tin  
DVD/VHS COMMON output  
Ge  
DVD-Video (digital connection)  
DVD only  
Connect an amplifier with a built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder.  
(l 7)  
Y
P
B
PR  
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT  
R - AUDIO - L  
VIDEO  
Change the settings in “Digital Audio Output”. (l 44)  
You cannot use any amplifier with a DTS Digital Surround decoder  
not suited to DVD.  
Even if using this connection, output will be only 2 channels when  
playing DVD-Audio  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
(480p/480i)  
OPTICAL  
R - AUD  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
R - AUDIO - L  
DVD OUT  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DVD output  
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT  
For DVD/VHS COMMON output terminals, both DVD and VHS  
signals can be output.  
(1) Rear panel of the unit  
(2) Optical digital output terminal  
(3) Optical digital audio cable  
(not supplied)  
(1)  
Y
P
B
PR  
R
-
AUD  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
(480p/480i)  
OPTICAL  
A Insert fully, with this side  
facing up. (Do not bend when  
connecting.)  
(2)  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
DVD OUT  
R
-
AUD  
DVD OUT  
This is the dedicated terminal to enjoy pictures played on DVD in  
higher picture quality. (l below)  
The DVD output terminals can only output the DVD signal. If your  
TV is connected to the DVD output terminals, the VHS picture is  
not displayed on your TV unless you select the TP channel (l 58).  
(4) Optical digital input terminal  
(5) Amplifier’s rear panel  
(3)  
A
To enjoy even higher fidelity  
(4)  
1 Connection to the S-VIDEO IN terminal  
OPTICAL IN  
DVD only  
(5)  
S-VIDEO OUT terminal  
The S-VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the  
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the TV.)  
1 Connection to a stereo amplifier  
(analog connection)  
DVD only  
TV  
(1) Audio input terminals (L/R)  
(1)  
(2)  
(2) S-Video input terminal  
(3) Audio cable (not supplied)  
A Red (R)  
B White (L)  
(4) S-Video cable (not  
supplied)  
(5) Rear panel of the unit  
(6) Audio output terminals (L/R)  
(7) S-Video output terminal  
(1) Rear panel of the unit  
(2) Audio output terminals (L/R)  
(1)  
AUDIO IN  
VIDEO IN  
R
L
S VIDEO IN  
Y
P
B
PR  
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT  
-
AUDIO  
-
VIDEO  
R(2)L  
(3) Audio cable (not supplied)  
A Red (R)  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
(480p/480i)  
OPTICAL  
GITAL AUDIO OUT  
CM/BITSTREAM)  
B White (L)  
UDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DVD
(3)  
(4) Audio input terminals (L/R)  
(5) Amplifier’s rear panel  
(4)  
(3)  
P
R
S COMMON OU
-
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
NENT VIDEO OUT  
(480p/480i)  
R
-
AUDIO  
-
R
AU
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
(6)  
DVD OUT  
(5)  
(7)  
(4)  
R
L
1 Connection to the COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
AUDIO IN  
(5)  
terminals  
DVD only  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal  
These terminals can be used for either interlace or progressive output  
(l  
64) and provide a purer picture than the S-VIDEO OUT terminal.  
Connect to terminals of the same color.  
TV  
(1) Component input terminals  
(2) Audio input terminals (L/R)  
(3) Component video cable  
(not supplied)  
(1)  
(2)  
AUDIO IN  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
R
L
(4) Audio cable (not supplied)  
A Red (R)  
B White (L)  
(5) Rear panel of the unit  
(4)  
(3)  
(6) COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
terminals  
(7) Audio output terminals (L/R)  
Y
P
B
PR  
S COMMON OUT  
-
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
(480p/480i)  
AL  
(6)  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
R
AU
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
(7)  
DVD OUT  
(5)  
15  
VQT0N92  
                         
Getting started  
STEP 2 Plug-in Auto Tuning  
The unit’s display  
Each time you press the button:  
CH 3 (Default setting) (# CH4 (# OFF  
^-----------------------------------------------J  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
POWER  
Í
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
[3] Use [3, 4] to select the language and press  
[ENTER].  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
VHS  
DVD  
[4] Press [ENTER] to start Plug-in Auto Tuning.  
The unit then proceeds with Auto Clock Setting. The time is  
displayed when Auto Clock Setting is finished.  
Numeric  
buttons  
CH, W, X  
Set Channels Automatically  
Set Clock Automatically  
AUDIO  
CANCEL/RESET  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
Auto Clock Setting is complete.  
1
Ch.  
SLOW/  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
Set Channels Automatically  
Proceeding .  
4/4/2005 12:15 AM  
DST............. On  
Time Zone.... CST  
.
.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
PLAY  
1
1
1
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
DST, Daylight Saving Time, shows the summertime setting.  
Time Zone shows the time difference from Greenwich Mean  
Time (GMT).  
3, 4, 2, 1  
ENTER  
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
EST (Eastern Standard Time) l GMT j5  
CST (Central Standard Time) l GMT j6  
MST (Mountain Standard Time) l GMT j7  
S
RETURN  
ADD/DLT  
SCHEDULE  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
JET REW  
PST (Pacific Standard Time)  
l GMT j8  
ADD/DLT  
F.REC  
REC  
REC MODE DVD ERASE  
CREATE  
AST (Alaska Standard Time) l GMT j9  
HST (Hawaii Standard Time) l GMT j10  
For other areas: xx hr  
COPYING  
CHAPTER  
After plugging the unit into your household AC outlet and pressing  
[Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on for the first time, the unit  
assists you to set the on-screen language, and automatically tunes in  
all the channels it can receive and sets the clock.  
[5] Press [ENTER].  
If the clock is an hour slower or faster than the actual  
time  
The unit automatically determines the type of transmission (airwaves  
or cable) and puts them into channels as follows.  
Select “j1” or “i1” in “Adjust Time Zone” in the SETUP menu  
(l 46).  
Band  
Channel  
2 to 13  
If the unit couldn’t set the clock automatically  
Set the time manually (l 46, “Set Clock Manually”).  
VHF  
Antenna Mode  
(Airwaves)  
To start Plug-in Auto Tuning again  
UHF  
14 to 69  
2 to 13  
VHF  
Signal source, RF output channel, channel caption, and  
guide channel settings for VCR Plusi system all revert to  
the default values when you perform the procedure below.  
Scheduled recording settings are also cleared.  
CATV LOW BAND  
CATV MID/SUPER BAND  
CATV HYPER BAND  
95 to 99  
14 to 36  
37 to 65  
CableTV Mode  
(Cable)  
When the unit is on and stopped  
[1] Press and hold [CH, W] and [CH, X] on the DVD side of the main  
unit for about 5 seconds.  
66 to 94  
100 to 125  
The unit turns off.  
[2] Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on.  
Plug-in Auto Tuning starts.  
SPECIAL CATV CHANNEL  
1
Preparation  
Turn on the TV and select the appropriate video input to suit the  
connections to the unit. (Example: AV input, CH3 or CH4)  
If you connect the unit through a cable TV box or satellite receiver  
(l 14), tune to your local PBS for Auto Clock Setting to work.  
If there is no local PBS, set the clock manually (l 46, “Set Clock  
Manually”).  
Press [DVD].  
[1] Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER].  
[2] Press [CH, W, X] to  
Select Language  
Seleccione la Lengua  
select an RF output  
Sélection de Langue  
channel number.  
English  
Español  
Connection (without Audio/  
Français  
Select “CH3” or “CH4” which  
displays the screen on the right.  
Press ENTER  
Pulse ENTER  
Appuyer sur ENTER  
Connection (with Audio/Video  
cable):  
The unit’s display  
Select “OFF”  
16  
VQT0N92  
   
Getting started  
d
e
If Plug-in Auto Tuning fails  
STEP 3 Channel settings  
art  
t
Preparation  
Press [DVD].  
s
g
Guide channel settings for VCR Plusi  
tin  
system  
[1] While stopped  
Ge  
®
Set these guide channels so you can use VCR Plusi system for  
Press [FUNCTIONS].  
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
scheduled recording. Before starting the settings, prepare a chart  
showing the channels, station names, and guide channels.  
e.g., :  
FUNCTIONS  
DVD  
DVD-RAM  
Cartridge Protection Off  
Disc Protection Off  
Station  
name  
Guide  
channel°  
Channel  
number°°  
Playback  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
PLAYLISTS  
Channel setting  
FLEXIBLE RECORDING  
Schedule  
SETUP  
SCHEDULE  
VCR Plus+  
CBS  
04  
04  
Unnecessary  
2
1
3
DISC MANAGEMENT  
Enter channel 15 next  
to Guide Channel 33.  
Dubbing  
ENTER  
DUBBING  
HBO  
33  
15  
Other Functions  
Return  
Enter channel 20 next  
to Guide Channel 38.  
Nickelodeon  
38  
20  
[3] Select “SETUP” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].  
SETUP  
Signal Source (RF IN)  
CableTV  
° Look up the guide channels for the stations in magazines.  
Set Channels Automatically  
°° Write down all the stations you can receive.  
Channel Captions  
Preset Channel Captions  
Channel  
Setup  
Disc  
If you have connected a cable TV box or satellite receiver, the  
VCR Plus_ system does not work so you do not have to set the  
guide channels.  
Manual Channel Captions  
VCR Plusi Ch. Setting  
Video  
[4] Select “Channel” with [3, 4] and press [2, 1].  
Preparation  
Press [DVD].  
[5] Select “Signal Source (RF IN)” with [3, 4] and  
press [ENTER].  
[1] While stopped  
SETUP  
Signal Source (RF IN)  
Press [FUNCTIONS].  
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
Antenna  
CableTV  
Channel  
Set Up  
[3] Select “SETUP” with  
SETUP  
Signal Source (RF IN)  
CableTV  
[6] Select “Antenna” or “CableTV” with [3, 4] and  
press [ENTER].  
[7] Select “Set Channels Automatically” with  
Set Channels Automatically  
[3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
[4] Select “Channel” with  
[3, 4] and press  
[2, 1].  
Channel Captions  
Preset Channel Captions  
Channel  
Setup  
Disc  
Manual Channel Captions  
VCR Plusi Ch. Setting  
[3, 4] and press [ENTER].  
Video  
[8] Press [ENTER].  
Auto Channel Setting starts. This takes a few minutes.  
[5] Select “VCR Plusr Ch.  
Setting” with [3, 4]  
SETUP  
VCR Plusi Ch. Settings  
[9] Press [ENTER].  
Guide Channel Cable Channel  
---  
---  
125  
1
and press [ENTER].  
e.g., “Signal Source (RF IN)” is  
set to “CableTV”.  
Channel  
SetUp  
To cancel in the middle  
Press [RETURN].  
Disc  
Video  
To exit the screen  
Press [RETURN].  
---  
---  
2
3
Audio  
Display  
TV Screen  
ENTER  
Adding and deleting channels  
Add or delete channels if necessary channels are not set or  
unnecessary channels are set.  
[6] Use [3, 4] to select  
the guide channel you  
want to set and press  
SETUP  
VCR Plusi Ch. Setting  
Guide Channel Cable Channel  
---  
---  
4
5
Channel  
SetUp  
[1].  
[1] Press the numeric buttons to select a channel.  
---  
Disc  
6
When selecting the guide  
channel, press and hold  
[3, 4] to scroll up and down  
the screen quickly.  
Antenna Mode (Airwaves)  
The unit’s display  
Video  
---  
---  
7
8
e.g.,  
“5”:  
“15”:  
[0] )[5]  
Audio  
Display  
TV Screen  
[1] )[5]  
ENTER  
CableTV Mode (Cable)  
[7] Use [3, 4] to select  
e.g.,  
“5”:  
“15”:  
“115”:  
[0] )[0] )[5]  
[0] )[1] )[5]  
[1] )[1] )[5]  
the channel corresponding to the guide channel  
and press [2].  
To delete a number, press [CANCEL/RESET, ¢].  
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to enter other channels.  
You can also use [CH, W, X] to select a channel.  
[2] Press [ADD/DLT].  
[8] Press [ENTER].  
e.g., The channel is deleted.  
Channel 15 Deleted  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [RETURN].  
17  
VQT0N92  
                     
Getting started  
1 Preset Channel Captions  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
TV, Í  
Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Channel captions”.  
[5] Select “Preset Channel Captions” with [3, 4]  
and press [ENTER].  
POWER  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
SETUP  
VHS  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
Preset Channel Captions  
DVD  
Caption Channel Number  
---  
---  
GLOB  
ABC  
Channel  
Setup  
Numeric  
buttons  
Disc  
AUDIO  
Video  
CANCEL/RESET  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
---  
---  
PBS  
CBS  
Audio  
Display  
TV Screen  
SLOW/  
ENTER  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
PFLUANYCTIONS  
[6] Use [3, 4] to select the caption and press [1].  
You can choose from the following captions.  
FUNCTIONS  
RETURN  
VHS MENU  
ABC, PBS, CBS, CNN, FOX, ESPN, NBC, HBO, A&E, AMC,  
FAM, MAX, MTV, SHOW, TBS, USA, TNT, CBC, UPN, CTV,  
WB, TSN, DSC, GLOB  
When selecting the caption, press and hold [3, 4] to scroll up  
and down the screen quickly.  
3, 4, 2, 1  
ENTER  
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
S
SCHEDULE  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
JET REW  
[7] Use [3, 4] to select the channel corresponding  
to the caption and press [2].  
Channels are displayed only when they contain a station and if  
captions have not been added manually.  
Preparation  
Press [DVD].  
To delete the channel number, press [CANCEL/RESET, ¢].  
Channel captions  
Repeat steps 6 and 7 as necessary.  
[8] Press [ENTER].  
You can use the preset captions, or manually enter new ones  
yourself.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
The captions you enter are used as channel names and displayed on  
the Direct Navigator screen.  
To exit the screen  
Press [RETURN].  
FUNCTIONS  
[1] While stopped  
Press [FUNCTIONS].  
[2] Select “Other  
DVD  
DVD-RAM  
Cartridge Protection Off  
Disc Protection Off  
Playback  
Schedule  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
PLAYLISTS  
FLEXIBLE RECORDING  
SETUP  
SCHEDULE  
VCR Plus+  
2
1
3
DISC MANAGEMENT  
1 Manual Channel Captions  
Functions” with [3, 4]  
and press [ENTER].  
Dubbing  
ENTER  
DUBBING  
Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Channel captions”.  
[5] Select “Manual Channel Captions” with [3, 4]  
and press [ENTER].  
[6] Use [3, 4] to select the channel and press [1].  
Channels are only displayed if they contain a station and if  
preset captions have not been added.  
Other Functions  
Return  
[3] Select “SETUP” with  
[3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
SETUP  
Signal Source (RF IN)  
CableTV  
Set Channels Automatically  
Channel Captions  
Preset Channel Captions  
Channel  
Setup  
Disc  
Manual Channel Captions  
VCR Plusi Ch. Setting  
[4] Select “Channel” with  
[3, 4] and press  
[2, 1].  
[7] Use [3, 4] to select the first character and  
Video  
press [1].  
You can choose from the following characters:  
A to Z, 0 to 9, -, &, !, /, (space)  
Go to the item you want to set next.  
To delete the caption, press [CANCEL/RESET, ¢].  
Repeat this step to enter the other characters.  
SETUP  
Manual Channel Captions  
Channel Number Caption  
----  
----  
6
8
Channel  
Setup  
AAAA  
10  
Disc  
Video  
----  
----  
12  
23  
Audio  
Display  
TV Screen  
ENTER  
[8] Use [2, 1] to return to the “Channel Number”  
column.  
Repeat steps 6 to 8 to enter other channels.  
[9] Press [ENTER].  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [RETURN].  
18  
VQT0N92  
           
Getting started  
d
e
STEP 4 Set up to match your TV and remote control  
art  
t
s
g
Preparation  
Press [DVD].  
TV operation  
To turn the TV on/off, change the TV input mode, select the TV  
channel and change the TV volume by means of this remote control,  
set the remote control as follows.  
tin  
Ge  
When other Panasonic products respond  
to this remote control  
Point the remote control at the TV  
While pressing [Í POWER TV], enter the code  
using the numeric buttons.  
e.g., 01: press [0] > [1].  
Change the remote control code on the main unit and on the remote  
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products  
close together. When changing the remote control code, make sure  
the two codes are same.  
Manufacturer and Code No.  
Use “1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.  
PHILIPS (RC-5)  
RCA  
03  
Panasonic  
National  
FUNCTIONS  
[1] While stopped  
DVD  
DVD-RAM  
Cartridge Protection Off  
Disc Protection Off  
01, 02  
05  
Press [FUNCTIONS].  
[2] Select “Other  
Functions” with [3, 4]  
and press [ENTER].  
[3] Select “SETUP” with  
[3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
Playback  
Schedule  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
PLAYLISTS  
QUASAR  
SAMSUNG  
SANYO  
14, 18, 19  
FLEXIBLE RECORDING  
SETUP  
SCHEDULE  
VCR Plus+  
FISHER  
GE  
10  
10  
2
1
3
DISC MANAGEMENT  
05  
SHARP  
06, 07  
08  
Dubbing  
ENTER  
DUBBING  
GOLDSTAR  
HITACHI  
JVC  
15, 16, 17  
SONY  
Other Functions  
Return  
12  
SYLVANIA  
THOMSON  
TOSHIBA  
ZENITH  
03  
11  
05  
LG  
15, 16, 17  
09  
[4] Select “Setup” with [3, 4] and press [2, 1].  
[5] Select “Remote Control Code” with [3, 4] and  
MAGNAVOX  
MITSUBISHI  
03  
13  
04  
press [ENTER].  
Test by turning on the TV and changing channels. Repeat the  
procedure until you find the code that allows correct operation.  
If your TV brand is not listed or if the code listed for your TV does  
not allow control of your TV, this remote control is not compatible  
with your TV.  
[6] Use [3, 4] to select the code (1, 2 or 3) and  
press [ENTER].  
The code on the unit has been set.  
[7] While pressing [ENTER], press and hold for  
about 2 seconds the numeric button ([1], [2] or  
[3]) corresponding to the code you selected in  
step 6.  
Selecting TV type  
You do not have to change the setting when connected to a 4:3  
standard aspect TV that is not compatible with progressive output.  
(l 64)  
The code on the remote control has been set.  
[8] Press [ENTER].  
[1] While stopped  
When the following indicator appears on the unit’s  
display  
Press [FUNCTIONS].  
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
[3] Select “SETUP” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].  
[4] Select “TV Screen” with [3, 4] and press  
[2, 1].  
[5] Select “TV Type” with [3, 4] and press  
The unit’s remote control code  
[ENTER].  
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s code  
TV Type  
SETUP  
(l step 7).  
4:3 TV  
Aspect 4:3 & 480i  
Aspect 4:3 & 480p  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
Channel  
Setup  
16:9 Widescreen TV  
Aspect 16:9 & 480i  
Aspect 16:9 & 480p  
Disc  
To exit the screen  
Press [RETURN].  
Video  
Audio  
Display  
TV Screen  
ENTER  
Aspect 4:3/Aspect 16:9:  
4:3  
16:9  
4:3 standard aspect TV  
16:9 widescreen TV  
480p/480i:  
Select “480p” if the TV is compatible with progressive output.  
[6] Use [3, 4] to select the item and press  
[ENTER].  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [RETURN].  
19  
VQT0N92  
               
Getting started  
The unit’s display  
Each time you press the button:  
CH 3 (Default setting) (# CH4 (# OFF  
^-----------------------------------------------J  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
POWER  
Í
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
Set the RF output channel of the DVD Video Recorder to “OFF”  
(RF OFF) when the DVD Video Recorder is connected to the  
TV via the Audio/Video cable.  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
VHS  
DVD  
[3] Press [ENTER] to finish this setting.  
CH, W, X  
Numeric  
buttons  
AUDIO  
CANCEL/RESET  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
SLOW/  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
:, 9  
6, 5  
PLAY  
1
;
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
3, 4, 2, 1  
2;, ;1  
ENTER  
The clear picture  
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
S
When you set the RF output channel to “CH3” or  
“CH4”  
SCHEDULE  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
JET REW  
A picture is output on CH3 or CH4 from RF output.  
REC  
REC MODE DVD ERASE ADD/DLT  
Press [VCR/TV] to switch the mode from TV to VCR, and vice  
versa.  
When the TV mode is selected, the “TV” indicator lights on the  
unit’s display and you can watch TV.  
CREATE  
DUBBING  
VHS DVD  
VCR/TV  
CHAPTER  
VCR/TV  
When the “TV” indicator does not light on, then VCR mode is  
selected and you can watch images from the unit.  
Removing Interference  
Connection (without Audio/Video cable) only  
TV screen  
Picture with interference  
In some cases, interference (lines or patterning) or a very poor  
picture may appear on the TV when the DVD Recorder is  
connected. If this happens, follow the steps below to change  
the video playback channel (RF output channel) to remove the  
interference.  
[1] Press [FUNCTIONS] for more than 5 seconds.  
The RF output channel number is displayed on the unit display.  
[2] Press [CH, W, X] to select a channel number  
(CH3 or CH4).  
(For example, if the original channel number was 3, enter 4.)  
<Before Changing>  
<Before Changing>  
RF Output Channel  
RF Output Channel  
Press the channel up/down buttons  
to select a RF Output Channel.  
Press the channel up/down buttons  
to select a RF Output Channel.  
Ch.  
3
Ch.  
4
ENTER  
ENTER  
The unit’s display  
The unit’s display  
Indication when the RF output  
channel is 3 (example)  
Indication after changing the RF  
output channel to 4 (example)  
20  
VQT0N92  
   
DVD  
Playback  
DVD  
d
e
Preparation  
Starting play from where you stopped it  
(Resume Function)  
art  
Turn on the TV and select the appropriate video input to suit the  
connections to the unit.  
Press [DVD].  
t
s
g
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]  
tin  
Ge  
[1] During Play  
Playing discs  
Press [, STOP].  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]  
[1] Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on.  
[2] Insert a disc. (l 8)  
Play stops and “PB” flashes on the unit’s  
display (Excluding when playing from the  
Direct Navigator and when playing a  
playlist.). The unit memorizes the  
position.  
k
c
ba  
ay  
Pl  
[3] Press [1, PLAY].  
[2] Press [1, PLAY].  
The disc tray closes and play begins.  
(The unit takes some time to read the disc before play starts.)  
Playback starts from the most recently recorded title.  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [-RW‹VR›]  
Play starts from where you stopped it.  
To cancel the resume function  
Press [, STOP] several times, “PB”  
disappears on the unit’s display.  
Playback starts from the beginning of the disc.  
[DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]  
(This function is also canceled when you turn  
the unit off or the tray is opened.)  
To stop play  
Press [, STOP]. (l right, “Resume Function”)  
The screen saver on the right may appear when  
you stop play. Press [, STOP] again and you  
can use the unit’s tuner to watch TV.  
Screen saver  
Fast forward and rewind — SEARCH  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]  
e.g., DVD-RAM  
[DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]  
During Play  
DVD-RAM  
Press [6, SLOW/SEARCH] or  
To pause play  
Press [;, PAUSE]. (Press again to restart play.)  
t2  
Stereo  
[5, SLOW/SEARCH].  
There are 5 search speeds. Each press  
increases the search speed.  
When a menu screen appears on the TV  
[VCD]  
Press [1, PLAY] to restart playback.  
Press the numeric buttons to select an item.  
For your reference  
e.g.:  
“5”: [0] )[5]  
Sound is output only in the first level of fast forward. In the case of  
DVD-Audio (except motion picture parts), CD and MP3, it is output  
in all levels.  
“15”: [1] )[5]  
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select an item and press [ENTER].  
You can sometimes use the numeric buttons to select an item.  
Depending on the disc, search may not be possible.  
Other buttons used to operate menus  
Read the disc’s instructions for further details about operation.  
Skipping  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]  
Note  
During play or while paused  
If “ ” appears on the TV, the operation is prohibited by the unit  
or disc.  
Press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP].  
Each press increases the number of skips.  
Quick View (Play t1.3)  
[RAM]  
Slow-motion play  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only) [DVD-V]  
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]  
The play speed can be increased without distorting the audio.  
During Play  
Press and hold [1, PLAY].  
While paused  
DVD-RAM  
Play  
DVD-RAM  
Play x1.3  
Press [6, SLOW/SEARCH] or [5, SLOW/  
SEARCH].  
To return to normal speed  
Press [1, PLAY].  
When slow motion play is continued for about 5 minutes it pauses  
automatically (excluding [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD]).  
There are 5 play speeds. Each press increases the play speed.  
Press [1, PLAY] to restart playback.  
[VCD] Forward direction ([5, SLOW/SEARCH]) only.  
Frame-by-frame viewing  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] (Motion picture parts only) [DVD-V]  
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]  
While paused  
Press [2;] ([2]) or [;1] ([1]).  
Each press shows the next or previous frame.  
Press and hold to change in succession forward or backward.  
Press [1, PLAY] to restart playback.  
[VCD] Forward direction ([;1], [1]) only.  
21  
VQT0N92  
                               
Playback  
DVD  
CM Skip  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
POWER  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [-RW‹VR›]  
You can skip approximately 1 minute with one press.  
During play  
Press [CM SKIP].  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
VHS  
DVD  
Displaying the TV image as a picture-in-  
picture/Selecting an amount of time to  
skip — Time Slip  
CH, W, X  
Numeric  
buttons  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
CM SKIP  
CANCEL/RESET  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [-RW‹VR›]  
SLOW/  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
Press [TIME SLIP] during play and the PIP (Picture-In-Picture) screen (TV  
image) is displayed in the lower right part of the main screen. You can  
watch both playback images and TV images at the same time. In the main  
screen, you can also instantly access a scene you want to view by  
specifying an amount of time you want to skip.  
:, 9  
PLAY  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
TOP MENU  
[1] During play  
Play  
(1)  
0 min  
Press [TIME SLIP].  
The PIP screen (TV images)  
3, 4, 2, 1  
ENTER  
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
SUB MENU  
appears.  
You can change the channel  
being received by pressing  
S
RETURN  
CH8  
(2)  
SCHEDULE  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
JET REW  
TIME SLIP  
[CH, W, X].  
You will hear the playback audio  
of the main screen.  
(1) Play images  
(2) Currently receiving images  
REC  
REC MODE DVD ERASE ADD/DLT  
CREATE  
DVD ERASE  
CREATE CHAPTER  
DUBBING  
VCR/TV  
CHAPTER  
VHS  
DVD  
[2] While observing the time  
indicator at the top right  
Play  
–5 min  
Preparation  
Press [DVD].  
Press [3, 4] to set an  
amount of time to skip  
CH8  
and press [ENTER].  
Play skips the amount of time  
you specified.  
Direct play  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]  
You can play from the title, chapter or track you select.  
The time indicator will go off after about 5 seconds, but will turn  
on again when you set the time.  
Press [3, 4] to alter in 1-minute units. Press and hold [3, 4]  
to alter in 10-minute units.  
During Play  
Press the numeric buttons to select an item.  
[CD] (MP3, JPEG and TIFF disc only)  
e.g.:  
“5”: [0] )[5]  
“15”: [1] )[5]  
“5”: [0] )[0] )[5]  
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]  
To clear the PIP screen  
Press [TIME SLIP].  
[DVD-A]  
For your reference  
A group number can be specified while the screen saver (l 21) is  
displayed.  
e.g.:  
The blue background does not appear on the PIP screen (l 45).  
You cannot change the channel being received while the PIP  
screen is being recorded.  
“5”: [5]  
This works only when stopped (screen saver is displayed) with  
some discs.  
Playing bonus groups  
Create chapters  
[RAM]  
Some discs contain bonus groups. If a password screen appears  
after selecting a group, enter the password with the numeric  
buttons and press [ENTER]. For the password, refer to the disc’s  
jacket, etc.  
During play  
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].  
Press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP] to skip to the start of a chapter.  
You cannot activate this function when you are carrying out TIME  
SLIP (l 27) or transfer (dub).  
Erasing a title that is being played  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
Once title is erased, it cannot be restored. Make certain before  
proceeding.  
Erase Title  
[1] During Play  
Press [DVD ERASE].  
[2] Press [2] to select  
Time remaining after erase 0 : 58(SP)  
Corresponding playlist chapters will be erased.  
Erase  
Cancel  
“Erase” and press  
ENTER  
For your reference  
You cannot erase while recording or transferring (dubbing).  
[-R] [+R] Available space does not increase after erasing.  
[-RW‹V›] Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is  
erased.  
22  
VQT0N92  
                   
Playback  
DVD  
Regarding MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)  
Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended  
formats) and Joliet  
Maximum number of files (tracks) and folders (groups)  
recognizable: 999 files (tracks) and 99 folders (groups)  
This unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of  
the disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.  
Operation may take time to complete when there are many files  
(tracks) and/or folders (groups) and some files (tracks) may not  
display or be playable.  
The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is  
displayed on a computer.  
Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files  
(tracks) and folders (groups) may not play in the order you  
numbered them.  
Changing audio during play  
Press [AUDIO] to select the audio type.  
You can select audio types depend on the recording medium.  
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] (l 47)  
Stereo# Mono L# Mono R  
^--------------------------------------}  
DVD-RAM  
Play  
e.g.: [RAM]  
“Stereo” is  
selected.  
k
c
Stereo  
ba  
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [When playing an SAP broadcast recorded on DVD-  
RAM, DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format)]  
MAIN () SAP  
[DVD-A] [DVD-V] (l 40)  
This allows you to change items like the audio channel number and  
ay  
Pl  
the sound track language.  
This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.  
Depending on the recording, some items may not be playable.  
Regarding MP3  
1 ENG  
Î Digital 3/2.1ch  
Soundtrack  
File format: MP3  
Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.  
Bit rates: 32 kbps to 320 kbps  
e.g.: English is the selected language. [DVD-V]  
Note  
Sampling frequency: 16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1 kHz/  
48 kHz  
This unit is not compatible with ID3 tags.  
Regarding still pictures (JPEG/TIFF)  
File format: JPEG, TIFF (non-compressed RGB chunky format)  
Files must have the extension “.jpg”, “.JPG”, “.tif” and “.TIF”.  
Number of pixels: 34 k 34 to 6144 k 4096  
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)  
Operation may take time to complete when playing TIFF format  
still pictures.  
If you cannot change the audio type when you have used only an  
optical digital cable for connection, set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM”  
(l 44). Alternatively, you may connect to an amplifier with an  
Audio/Video cable and change the input on the amplifier to suit the  
connection.  
2
and still pictures  
[CD]  
MOTION JPEG is not supported.  
The screen shown below is displayed when you insert a disc  
containing MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF).  
Using menus to play MP3 discs  
[CD]  
The unit plays MP3 files recorded on CD-R/RW designed for audio  
recording that are finalized (l 64) on a computer. Files are treated  
as tracks and folders are treated as groups.  
Press [ENTER].  
Playback mode is set to MP3.  
If you want to play picture (JPEG),  
select JPEG Menu from Menu in FUNCTIONS.  
To play MP3  
Refer to “Using menus to play MP3 discs”.  
(l right)  
To play still pictures  
ENTER  
Refer to “To show JPEG Menu”. (l 24)  
[1] During stop or play  
Press [TOP MENU].  
The file list appears.  
You can play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) on this unit by  
making folders as shown below. However depending on how  
you create the disc (writing software), play may not be in the  
order you numbered the folders.  
Selected Group No. and Name  
No.  
1
Total  
1
Group  
Track  
Menu  
:
MP3_MUSIC  
English alphabetical characters and Arabic numerals are  
displayed correctly. Other characters may not be displayed  
correctly.  
When the highest level folders are “DCIM” folders, they are  
displayed first on the tree.  
G:  
G
T
1
1
Tree  
001 Both Ends Freezing  
The Group Number  
T:  
Track Number in the Group  
Total:  
Total  
1/ 24  
No.  
0
9
Prev.  
Next  
Selected Track Number/  
Total Track Number  
Structure of MP3 folders  
Prefix with 3-digit numbers  
in the order you want to play  
them.  
Structure of still pictures  
(JPEG/TIFF)  
ENTER  
Page 001/016  
Files inside a folder are  
displayed in the order they  
were updated or taken.  
Root  
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the track and press  
[ENTER].  
Play starts on the selected track.  
Tree  
“  
” indicates the track currently playing.  
P0000001.jpg  
P0000002.jpg  
001 A  
You can also directly select the track with the numeric buttons.  
e.g.:  
002 C  
001track.mp3 (B)  
002track.mp3  
003track.mp3  
“6”: [0] )[0] )[6]  
“10”: [0] )[1] )[0]  
Using the tree screen to find a group (l 24)  
P0000003.jpg  
P0000004.jpg  
P0000005.jpg  
002 A  
001track.mp3  
003 A  
003 C  
002track.mp3  
003track.mp3  
004track.mp3  
P0000006.jpg  
004 C  
P0000007.jpg  
To show other groups  
P0000008.jpg  
P0000009.jpg  
001track.mp3  
002track.mp3  
003track.mp3  
Press [:] (Prev.) or [9] (Next) to show other pages.  
After listing all the tracks in one group, the list for the next group  
appears.  
P0000010.jpg  
P0000011.jpg  
P0000012.jpg  
Order of play  
Order of play  
AFolder = Group  
BFile = Track  
CFolder  
To exit the file list  
Press [TOP MENU] or [RETURN].  
23  
VQT0N92  
         
Playback  
DVD  
JPEG Menu screen  
To show other pages  
Press [:] (Previous) or [9]  
(Next) to show other pages.  
JPEG Menu  
CD (JPEG)  
Picture (JPEG) View  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
POWER  
Folder  
08 8 10/27 Mon  
Í
You can also press [  
3
,
4
,
2
,
1] to  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
select “Previous” or “Next” and press  
[ENTER] to show other pages.  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
VHS  
DVD  
Previous  
Page 01/01  
Next  
To exit the JPEG Menu  
Play  
Press [TOP MENU] or [RETURN].  
CH, W, X  
AUDIO  
Numeric  
buttons  
1 Playing a still picture  
Make sure that JPEG Menu screen appears by following the steps  
AUDIO  
CANCEL/RESET  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
“To show JPEG Menu”.  
SLOW/  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a still picture you want  
:, 9  
PLAY  
to watch and press [ENTER].  
You can also select a still picture by entering a 3-digit with the  
numeric buttons.  
;
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
TOP MENU  
e.g.:  
“5”: [0] )[0] )[5]  
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]  
FUNCTIONS  
You can watch the still pictures in order by pressing [2]  
(previous) or [1] (next).  
3, 4, 2, 1  
ENTER  
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
S
RETURN  
SUB MENU  
To rotate a still picture  
[1] Press [SUB MENU].  
[2] Select “Rotate Right” or “Rotate Left” with [3, 4]  
and press [ENTER].  
Rotate Right  
SCHEDULE  
STATUS  
JET REW  
DISPLAY  
Rotate Left  
STATUS  
Zoom in  
REC  
REC MODE  
DVD ERASE ADD/DLT  
CREATE  
ENTER  
REC MODE  
µ
Rotation information will not be stored.  
COPYING  
VCR/TV  
CHAPTER  
VHS  
DVD  
To zoom in/out  
[1] Press [SUB MENU].  
[2] Select “Zoom in” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].  
Using the tree screen to find a group  
To return the picture to its original size, press [3, 4] to select  
“Zoom out” in step [2] and press [ENTER].  
When zooming in, the still picture may be cut off.  
The enlargement information will not be stored.  
The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still  
[1] While the file list is displayed (l 23)  
Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display  
the tree screen.  
Tree  
Selected Group Number/Total  
Group Number  
If the group has no track, “– –”  
is displayed as group number.  
Menu  
G
1/ 15  
3
G
T
1
1
MP3_MUSIC  
001 My favorite  
001 Brazillian pops  
002 Chinese pops  
003 Czech pops  
004 PC Files  
005 Japanese pops  
006 Swedish pops  
001 Momoko  
Total  
1/ 24  
9
To show the picture properties  
[1] Press [STATUS] twice.  
3/24 10:15 PM  
No.  
Press [STATUS] again, the  
properties disappear.  
0
Date 3/23/2005  
No. 100/123  
002 Standard Number  
001 Piano solo  
002 Vocal  
3
ENTER  
Shooting Date  
1 Start Slide Show/Slide Interval  
Make sure that JPEG Menu screen appears by following the steps  
“To show JPEG Menu”.  
A folder which has no MP3 files is indicated in black. You  
cannot select groups with no MP3 files.  
Press [2, 1] to jump layers in the tree screen.  
[2] Press [3, 4] to select a group and press  
[ENTER].  
You can display still pictures one by one with constant interval.  
JPEG Menu  
CD (JPEG)  
Picture (JPEG) View  
[1] Select “Folder” with [3]  
and press [SUB MENU].  
[2] Select “Start Slide  
Show” with [3, 4] and  
press [ENTER].  
The file list for the selected group appears.  
Folder  
08 8 10/27 Mon  
To return to the file list  
Press [RETURN].  
Start Slide Show  
Slide Interval  
To show JPEG Menu  
[CD] [with MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF]  
To Change the display timing  
[1] Select “Slide Interval” with [3, 4] in step 2 and press [ENTER].  
[2] Press [2, 1] to select the desired timing (0 to 30 seconds) and  
press [ENTER].  
FUNCTIONS  
VOL_200411291118  
Playback Mode: MP3  
DVD  
CD(MP3/JPEG)  
[1] Press [FUNCTIONS].  
[2] Select “MENU” with [3,  
4] and press [ENTER].  
[3] Select “JPEG Menu”  
with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
Menu  
Playback  
MENU  
Menus  
1 To select the still pictures in another folder  
Make sure that JPEG Menu screen appears by following the steps  
“To show JPEG Menu”.  
Select a playback mode from  
the following menus.  
MP3 Menu  
JPEG Menu  
You can display still pictures one by one with a constant interval.  
[CD] [with still pictures (JPEG/TIFF) only]  
[1] Select “Folder” with [3]  
AB  
JPEG Menu  
CD (JPEG)  
Select Folder  
Press [TOP MENU].  
and press [ENTER].  
[2] Select the folder with  
[3, 4] and press  
F
1/1  
12_02_2005  
[ENTER].  
ASelected folder no./Total folder no.  
BYou cannot select folders that  
contain no compatible files.  
ENTER  
24  
VQT0N92  
             
Recording  
DVD  
Recording TV programs  
Recording procedures  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
Recording modes and approximate  
recording times  
You can record up to 99 titles on a disc (49 titles [+R]).  
It is not possible to record digital broadcasts that allow “One time  
only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R or 8 cm (3q) DVD-RAM  
discs. Use a CPRM compatible DVD-RAM  
Recording will take place on open space on the disc. Data will not  
be overwritten.  
(Unit: hour)  
DVD-RAM  
Single-sided Double-sided  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
+R  
k
c
ba  
(4.7 GB)  
(9.4 GB)  
ay  
(4.7 GB)  
Pl  
If there is no space left on the recording disc, you will need to erase  
unwanted titles (l 22, 33) or use a new disc.  
XP (High quality)  
SP (Normal)  
1
2
2
1
2
4
8
g
When recording to DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +R  
When recording MTS broadcasts  
- If you do not connect a cable TV box  
LP (Long play)  
EP (Extra long play)  
4
4
in  
rd  
8 (6°)  
16 (12°)  
8 (6°)  
o
c
Select “Main” or “SAP” in “Select MTS” in the SETUP menu  
(l 44).  
- If you connect a cable TV box  
Re  
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may  
become shorter than indicated.  
Select “Main” or “SAP” on the cable TV box.  
The aspect ratio of the recorded image will be 4:3.  
In order to play a DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +R  
recorded using this unit on another playback source, the  
disc must first be finalized (l 31).  
XP  
SP  
LP  
Preparation  
Release protection (disc l 30, cartridge l 30). [RAM]  
Select an audio type you want to record. (l right below)  
Press [DVD].  
EP (6H)°  
EP (8H)  
[1] Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on.  
Recording time  
[2] Insert a disc. (l 8)  
° When “Recording Time in EP Mode” has been set to “EP (6H)” in  
the SETUP menu. (l 43)  
The sound quality is lower compared to other recording modes  
When using a DVD-RAM for the first time with the unit, format it  
to ensure accurate recording (l 31, “Format Disc”).  
[3] Press [CH, W, X] to select the channel.  
when using “EP (8H)”.  
To select with the numeric  
buttons:  
Note  
Antenna Mode  
(Airwaves)  
When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8H) mode, play may not be  
possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this  
case use EP (6H) mode.  
e.g.,  
“5”:  
“15”:  
[0] )[5]  
[1] )[5]  
FR (Flexible Recording model 26):  
You can set FR mode when transferring (dubbing) or programming  
scheduled recordings.  
CableTV Mode (Cable)  
e.g.,  
“5”:  
“15”:  
“115”:  
[0] )[0] )[5]  
[0] )[1] )[5]  
[1] )[1] )[5]  
Selecting audio to record  
[RAM]  
Preparation  
Press [DVD].  
[4] Press [REC MODE]  
to select the  
recording mode  
(XP, SP, LP or EP).  
Press [AUDIO].  
Stereo # SAP # Mono  
^----------------------------}  
Remaining time on the disc  
[5] Press [¥, REC] to  
Stereo:  
Main audio (stereo). If the broadcast is “Mono_SAP”,  
audio will be monaural even if you select Stereo  
mode.  
start recording.  
You cannot change the  
channel or recording  
mode during recording.  
You can change them  
SAP:  
Secondary audio program (SAP). If recorded in SAP,  
main audio is also recorded.  
Mono:  
Main audio (monaural). Select “Mono” if reception is  
poor during a stereo broadcast.  
while recording is paused, but the material is recorded as a  
separate title.  
No disc  
e.g., “Stereo” is selected.  
“((” appears when the unit is receiving  
To pause recording  
Press [;, PAUSE]. (Press again to restart recording.)  
Title is not split into separate titles.  
CH 12  
the audio type you selected.  
((Stereo  
You can also press [¥, REC] to restart recording.  
If you change the sound setting while recording, the recorded  
To stop recording  
sound will also change.  
Press [, STOP].  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
Recorded as 1 title until the position where stopped.  
It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to complete recording  
management information after recording finishes. [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
Select the audio (Main or SAP) in “Select MTS” in  
the SETUP menu. (l 44)  
25  
VQT0N92  
                 
Recording  
DVD  
Flexible Recording mode (FR)  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
CH, W, X  
POWER  
VOLUME  
The unit calculates a recording rate that enables the recording to fit  
in the time you set (within the remaining time on the disc) with the  
best picture quality.  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
TV/VIDEO  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
VHS  
DVD  
Using “FLEXIBLE RECORDING” is convenient in these kind  
of situations.  
When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an  
appropriate recording more difficult  
When you want to record a long program with the best picture  
quality possible  
Numeric  
buttons  
AUDIO  
CANCEL/RESET  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
SLOW/  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
e.g., Recording a 90 minute program to disc  
If you select XP mode, the program will not fit one disc.  
PLAY  
1
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
A second disc is necessary for  
30 minutes of the program.  
DIRECT  
NAVIGATOR  
FUNCTIONS  
4.7 GB  
DVD-RAM  
4.7 GB  
DVD-RAM  
3, 4, 2, 1  
If you select SP mode, the program will fit one disc.  
ENTER  
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
S
RETURN  
SCHEDULE  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
JET REW  
However there will be 30 minutes  
remaining disc space  
TIME SLIP  
STATUS  
4.7 GB  
DVD-RAM  
REC  
REC MODE DVD ERASE ADD/DLT  
CREATE  
µ
DUBBING  
VHS DVD  
VCR/TV  
CHAPTER  
VCR/TV  
If you select “FLEXIBLE RECORDING” the  
program will fit one disc perfectly.  
4.7 GB  
DVD-RAM  
Preparation  
Press [DVD].  
Preparation  
Press [DVD].  
Select the channel to record.  
Specifying the time when recording will  
stop  
While recording  
Press [¥, REC] to select the recording time.  
On the main unit, press [¥, REC] on the DVD.  
FUNCTIONS  
[1] While stopped  
Press [FUNCTIONS].  
[2] Select “Other  
Functions” with [3, 4]  
and press [ENTER].  
[3] Select “FLEXIBLE  
RECORDING” with  
[3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
DVD  
DVD-RAM  
Cartridge Protection Off  
Disc Protection Off  
Playback  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
PLAYLISTS  
FLEXIBLE RECORDING  
Schedule  
SETUP  
SCHEDULE  
VCR Plus+  
2
1
3
DISC MANAGEMENT  
Dubbing  
ENTER  
DUBBING  
The unit’s display  
Each time you press the button:  
Counter (Cancel) # OFF 0:30 # OFF 1:00 # OFF 1:30  
^------- OFF 4:00 ! OFF 3:00 ! OFF 2:00 !----------}  
Other Functions  
Return  
FLEXIBLE RECORDING  
Record in FR mode.  
Maximum rec. time  
1 Hour 23 Min.  
1 Hour 23 Min.  
For your reference  
This does not work during scheduled recording or Flexible  
Recording.  
Recording stops and the set time is cleared if you press [, STOP].  
The set time is cleared if you change the recording mode or  
channel while recording is paused.  
Set recording time  
[4] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to  
Start  
Cancel  
set the recording time.  
You can also set the  
recording time with the  
numeric buttons.  
Maximum recording time is 8 hours.  
[5] Select “Start” with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press  
Watching the TV while recording  
Preparation  
Connection (without Audio/Video cable)  
- Make sure that the TV indicator is lit on the unit’s display. If it is  
not lit, press [VCR/TV] to light it.  
[ENTER].  
Recording starts.  
To exit the FLEXIBLE RECORDING window without  
recording  
Press [RETURN].  
Connection (with Audio/Video cable)  
- Press [TV/VIDEO] to change the input mode to “TV”.  
To stop recording in the middle  
Press [, STOP].  
Press TV’s [CH, W, X] to select the desired TV  
channel.  
To show the time remaining until recording finishes  
Press [STATUS].  
It is displayed in units of minutes.  
For your reference  
You can also do this if the unit is making a scheduled recording.  
The recording is unaffected.  
DVD-RAM  
Rec. 1:22  
CH 12  
Stereo  
Remaining  
time  
For your reference  
During a Flexible Recording, all recording mode indicators light up  
on the unit’s display.  
It is not possible to change the channel or recording mode while  
Flexible Recording is paused.  
26  
VQT0N92  
         
Recording  
DVD  
TIME SLIP  
Playing while you are recording  
Press [TIME SLIP] while recording; play starts from 30 seconds  
previous to that moment. You can start play from even earlier by  
specifying an amount of time to skip on the time indicator.  
[RAM]  
Preparation  
Press [DVD].  
[1] While recording or  
Play  
0 min  
Hint  
(1)  
scheduled recording  
Press [TIME SLIP].  
The PIP screen (images  
being currently recorded) is  
displayed.  
On the main screen, play  
starts from 30 seconds  
previous to that moment.  
You will hear the playback  
audio.  
Sound is not output while fast-forwarding.  
Chasing play  
You can start play from the beginning of the title while continuing to  
record it.  
Rec.  
(2)  
(1) Play images  
While recording or scheduled recording  
Press [1, PLAY].  
(30 seconds before)  
(2) Currently recording  
g
in  
Play starts while recording proceeds.  
rd  
o
c
For your reference  
Re  
Play cannot be started until at least 2 seconds after recording  
starts.  
[2] While observing the time  
indicator at the top right  
Play  
–5 min  
Press [3, 4] to set an  
amount of time to skip  
and press [ENTER].  
Play skips the amount of time  
you specified.  
Simultaneous recording and play  
You can play a title previously recorded while you are recording  
another title.  
Rec.  
[1] While recording or scheduled recording  
The time indicator will go off after about 5 seconds, but will turn  
on again when you set the time.  
Press [3, 4] to alter in 1-minute units. Press and hold [3, 4]  
to alter in 10-minute units.  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR]. (l 33)  
¥: Currently recording  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Title View  
DVD-RAM  
To show the play images in full  
Press [TIME SLIP].  
07  
08  
09  
10 10/25 MON  
8
10/25 MON  
8
10/26 TUE  
Press [TIME SLIP] to return to the PIP screen.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
For your reference  
The image on the PIP screen may be distorted or flicker depending  
on the scene. However, this does not affect the image recorded.  
[2] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title and press  
[ENTER].  
Play starts while recording proceeds.  
To stop play and recording  
[1] Press [, STOP]. Play stops.  
To exit the Direct Navigator screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
(Wait 2 or more seconds.)  
[2] Press [, STOP]. Recording stops.  
For your reference  
You cannot stop recording with [, STOP] during scheduled  
recording. To stop scheduled recording, press [, STOP],  
then [ENTER] within 5 seconds.  
- You can also press and hold [] on the main unit for 3 or  
more seconds to stop scheduled recording.  
During simultaneous recording and play, you cannot edit or erase  
titles with the Direct Navigator or playlists.  
Even if you start play while the unit is on standby for scheduled  
recording, recording starts when the time you set is reached.  
Playing/Recording VHS while recording  
You can play or record tapes while recording. The recording will not  
be affected.  
VHS playback (l 49)  
VHS recording (l 51)  
- When a tuner channel is being recorded on DVD, you can only  
record the same channel on VHS.  
27  
VQT0N92  
               
Recording  
DVD  
Scheduled Recording  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
POWER  
You can enter up to 16 programs a month in advance.  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
Preparation  
Release protection (disc l 30, cartridge l 30) [RAM].  
Insert a disc (l 8) and confirm there is sufficient empty space for  
recording on it (l 47).  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
VHS  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
DVD  
Check that the clock is set to the correct time.  
Press [DVD].  
Numeric  
buttons  
AUDIO  
Using VCR Plus_ system  
VCR Plusi  
CANCEL/RESET  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
®
SLOW/  
Entering the PlusCode numbers is an easy way of scheduled  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
recording. You can find these codes in TV listings in newspapers and  
magazines.  
PLAY  
When connecting a cable TV box or satellite receiver, the VCR  
Plusi system does not work. Program the scheduled recording  
manually (l 29).  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
[1] Press [VCR Plus_].  
3, 4, 2, 1  
4:00 LP  
7/13 Tue 12:53 PM  
Remaining Recording Time  
ENTER  
VCR Plus+  
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
S
RETURN  
SCHEDULE  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
JET REW  
SCHEDULE  
REC MODE  
[2] Press the numeric buttons to enter the  
PlusCode number.  
REC  
REC MODE DVD ERASE ADD/DLT  
CREATE  
COPYING  
VHS  
VCR/TV  
CHAPTER  
DVD  
Press [2] to move back to correct a digit.  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
[3] Press [ENTER].  
Preparation  
4:00 LP  
Remaining Recording Time  
SCHEDULED  
RECORDING  
7/13 Tue 12:53 PM  
Press [DVD].  
Channel  
39  
Date  
On  
Off  
Mode  
7/20 Tue 10:00 PM 11:00 PM SP  
Cautions for using scheduled recording  
on DVD and VHS  
Scheduled recording automatically starts at the set  
time.  
Scheduled recording can be started whether the unit is turned on or  
off. When the unit is turned off, the sound and the video cannot be  
outputted to the TV.  
Title Name  
Confirm the program and correct it if necessary using [3, 4,  
2, 1] (“Manual programming” l 29, step 2).  
When “XP” is displayed in the unit’s display, the recording  
mode automatically changes to “FR” in order to prevent loss of  
recording when there is not enough space. Change to “XP”  
mode if you want to set scheduled recording using “XP” mode.  
“Invalid Entry” is displayed when you enter the wrong PlusCode  
number. Reenter the PlusCode number.  
Scheduled recording for TV programs cannot be  
executed on both DVD and VHS at the same time.  
Make sure the scheduled recording start times do not overlap on  
both DVD (l 29) and VHS (l 53) Scheduled Recording List  
screens.  
To enter the name of the program  
Press [2, 1] to select “Title Name” and press [ENTER]  
(l 32).  
[4] If the program is correct  
Press [ENTER].  
When the scheduled recording settings overlap:  
When the start time of both scheduled recordings is the same, the  
scheduled recording of DVD has priority.  
“ ” lights on the unit’s display.  
Make sure that the scheduled recording has been programmed  
correctly on the SCHEDULED LIST screen (l 29).  
Repeat steps 1–4 to program other recordings.  
When the same tuner channels are specified in scheduled  
recordings on both DVD and VHS, only one scheduled recording  
can be started.  
When the interval between the first scheduled recording and the  
second scheduled recording on DVD is 1 minute or less as shown  
below, the second scheduled recording on DVD has priority over  
the scheduled recording on VHS even if its start time is later than  
the scheduled recording on VHS.  
[5] Press [RETURN].  
To stop recording while a program is working  
Press [, STOP], then [ENTER] within 5 seconds.  
You can also press and hold [] on the DVD of the main unit for 3  
or more seconds to stop recording.  
1 minute  
Note  
Refer to Note in Manual programming (l 29).  
DVD  
2 CH  
VHS  
4 CH  
10 CH  
When the scheduled recording settings of DVD and VHS are  
overlapped, the setting of DVD takes priority.  
“ ” lights on the unit’s display of both sides in the standby mode.  
When the recording starts, “ ” on the recording side (DVD side)  
remains lit and the “ ” on the other side (VHS side) starts flashing.  
28  
VQT0N92  
           
Recording  
DVD  
Manual programming  
Check, change or delete programs  
When connecting a cable TV box or satellite receiver, select the  
channel on the cable TV box or satellite receiver before scheduled  
recording starts.  
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the scheduled  
recording list by pressing [SCHEDULE].  
Preparation  
[1] Press [SCHEDULE].  
Press [DVD].  
Make sure “New Scheduled Recording” is selected.  
[1] Press [SCHEDULE].  
4:00 LP  
7/13 Tue 12:57 PM  
SCHEDULE  
LIST  
Remaining Recording Time  
4:00 LP  
New Scheduled  
Recording is  
selected.  
SCHEDULE  
LIST  
Remaining Recording Time  
7/13 Tue 12:57 PM  
Off ModeCheck  
39 N7/e6wTSUcEhe2d0u:l0e0dPRMec2o1rd:0in0gPM SP OK  
No Channel Date  
On  
Off ModeCheck  
No Channel Date  
01  
On  
01  
39 7/ 20 Tue 10:00 PM 11:00 PM SP OK  
New Scheduled Recording  
B
A
[2] Press [ENTER] to move and change the items  
Icon explanations (A)  
¥ Currently recording  
using [3, 4, 2, 1].  
g
in  
4:00 LP  
Remaining Recording Time  
SCHEDULED  
RECORDING  
rd  
7/13 Tue 12:53 PM  
o
c
W
Programs are overlapped. Recording of the program with the  
later start time starts when the earlier program finishes  
recording.  
Channel  
Date  
On  
:
Off  
:
Mode  
Re  
Title Name  
n
F
X
You stopped a weekly or daily scheduled recording. The icon  
disappears when the next scheduled recording starts.  
The disc was full. (not enough space)  
The TV program may not be recorded due to copy-protect.  
Recording stopped (Dirty disc, etc.)  
You may use the numeric buttons to enter “Channel”, “Date”,  
“On”, and “Off”.  
Channel (Program Position/TV Station Name)  
Date  
Check (B)  
OK:  
You can also make a daily or weekly program.  
Each daily or weekly program is counted as one program.  
On (start time)/Off (finish time)  
The time increases or decreases in 30-minute increments if  
you hold down the button.  
Recordable  
# (Date): The last day of daily or weekly recording.  
!:  
It may not be possible to record because:  
the disc is write-protected  
there is no more space left  
Mode (Recording mode)  
the number of possible titles has reached its maximum.  
You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording  
mode.  
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the program.  
You may also select program by inputting a 2-digit number  
using the numeric buttons.  
XP,.SP,.LP,.EP,.FR,.XP... (l 25)  
Title Name  
Press [2, 1] to select “Title Name” and press [ENTER]  
(l 32).  
e.g.:  
“5”: [0] )[5]  
“15”: [1] )[5]  
Press [2, 1] to move to the preceding or following page.  
[3] Press [ENTER] when you have finished making  
[3] Press [CANCEL/RESET, ¢] to delete,  
You cannot delete programs that are currently recording.  
or press [ENTER] to change.  
changes.  
“ ” lights on the unit’s display.  
“Invalid Entry” is displayed when you enter the wrong item.  
Reenter the item.  
The scheduled recording setting screen appears.  
Make sure that the scheduled recording has been programmed  
correctly on the SCHEDULE LIST screen (l right).  
To continue programming:  
[4] If you pressed [ENTER] in step 3,  
Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to change and press [ENTER].  
Select “New Scheduled Recording” and repeat steps 2–3.  
[5] Press [RETURN].  
[4] Press [RETURN].  
For your reference  
Programs that failed to record are not deleted from the list  
immediately (indicated in gray), but are deleted from the list  
automatically at 4 a.m. 2 days later.  
During scheduled recording, you can change the end time as long  
as the recording mode is not “FR”.  
To stop recording while a program is working  
Press [, STOP], then press [ENTER] within 5 seconds.  
You can also press and hold [] on the DVD of the main unit for 3  
or more seconds to stop recording.  
Note  
When the unit is carrying out a scheduled recording, you may  
utilize playback.  
When the disc is not inserted, the disc is full or a non-recordable  
disc is inserted, the warning message appears because scheduled  
recording is disabled.  
“ ” flashes when the unit cannot perform scheduled recording  
(non-recordable disc or protected disc, etc.). Check the disc  
carefully.  
The actual time recorded may be longer than the program itself  
when TV programs are recorded using VCR Plus_ system.  
When recording more than one program in a row, for DVD-RAM the  
first few seconds, and for DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or  
+R about the first 30 seconds of all programs from the second one  
onwards will not be recorded.  
If you set “DST” (Daylight Saving Time) to “ON” when manually  
setting the clock (l 46), scheduled recording may not work when  
summer switches to winter and vice versa.  
29  
VQT0N92  
           
Editing  
DVD  
1 Disc Name  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
POWER  
VOLUME  
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DISC MANAGEMENT”.  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
[4] Select “Disc Name” with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
Refer to “Entering text” (l 32).  
The disc name is displayed in the FUNCTIONS window.  
With a finalized DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R, the  
name is displayed on the Top Menu.  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
VHS  
DVD  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
3, 4, 2, 1  
123  
FUNCTIONS  
DVD  
Cartridge Protec  
Disc Protection  
ENTER  
DVD-RAM  
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
Playback  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
S
RETURN  
SCHEDULE  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
JET REW  
1 Disc Protection  
[RAM]  
DISC MANAGEMENT  
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DISC MANAGEMENT”.  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
This allows you to protect the whole disc from accidental erasure and  
release disc protection.  
Preparation  
Release protection (disc l right, cartridge l right). [RAM]  
Insert a disc (l 8).  
Press [DVD].  
[4] Select “Disc Protection” with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
[5] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].  
To protect  
[1] While stopped  
e.g., DVD-RAM  
Press [FUNCTIONS].  
FUNCTIONS  
DVD  
Cartridge Protection Off  
Disc Protection Off  
Disc Protection  
DVD-RAM  
DISC  
MANAGEMENT  
DVD-RAM  
Titles  
Used  
7
Free  
0 : 42 (SP)  
[2] Select “Other  
Functions” with [3, 4]  
and press [ENTER].  
[3] Select “DISC  
MANAGEMENT” with  
[3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
Playback  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
PLAYLISTS  
Setup disc protection.  
0 : 58  
FLEXIBLE RECORDING  
Note: Protected discs cannot be renamed  
or have their contents changed,  
but can still be re-formatted.  
Schedule  
SETUP  
SCHEDULE  
VCR Plus+  
Disc Name  
Disc Protection  
Erase All Titles  
Format disc  
2
1
3
DISC MANAGEMENT  
On  
Yes  
No  
Dubbing  
ENTER  
DUBBING  
Other Functions  
Return  
ENTER  
To release protection  
e.g., DVD-RAM  
e.g., DVD-R  
Disc Protection  
DISC  
MANAGEMENT  
DISC  
DISC  
MANAGEMENT  
DVD-R  
Titles  
Used  
7
Free  
0 : 42 (SP)  
MANAGEMENT  
Cancel disc protection.  
Note: All write restrictions will  
be released.  
DVD-RAM  
Titles  
Used  
7
Free  
0 : 42 (SP)  
Titles  
Used  
7
Free  
0 : 42 (SP)  
0 : 58  
DVD-RAM  
0 : 58  
0 : 58  
Disc Name  
Disc Protection  
Erase All Titles  
Format disc  
Disc Name  
Disc Protection  
Erase All Titles  
Format disc  
Disc Name  
Off  
Off  
Playback will start with: Top Menu  
Finalize  
Yes  
No  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
[4] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item and press  
Protection of cartridge disc  
You can protect the contents of your discs.  
With the write-protect tab in the protect  
position, you cannot record to, edit, or erase  
from the disc.  
[ENTER].  
You can change various settings.  
After this operation, follow the desired operation.  
PROTECT  
To stop in the middle  
Press [RETURN].  
1 Erase All Titles  
[RAM]  
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DISC MANAGEMENT”.  
Once erased, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored.  
Make certain before proceeding.  
[4] Select “Erase All titles” with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
[5] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].  
[6] Select “Start” with [2] and press [ENTER].  
A message appears when finished.  
[7] Press [ENTER].  
Note  
Erasing all video titles will result in all playlists also being erased.  
Erase does not work if one or more titles are protected.  
30  
VQT0N92  
                     
Editing  
DVD  
1 Format Disc  
1 Finalize  
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [-RW‹VR›]  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DISC MANAGEMENT”.  
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DISC MANAGEMENT”.  
Make selection from “Playback will start with:” before finalizing the  
disc. (l below left)  
Formatting erases all contents (including computer data), and  
they cannot be restored. Check carefully before proceeding.  
The contents are erased when you format a disc even if you have  
set protection.  
You can play DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +R on  
compatible DVD players by finalizing it on the unit, effectively making  
it into DVD-Video that complies with DVD-Video standards.  
The menu you create with the unit can also be used on DVD players.  
[4] Select “Format disc” with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
[4] Select “Finalize” with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
[5] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].  
Format Disc  
[5] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].  
e.g., DVD-RAM  
Finalize  
Formatting the disc will erase all contents.  
This will take approximately 1 minute.  
Do you want to continue?  
Finalizing will take approximately  
Do you want to continue? (Required for  
playback on compatible DVD players.)  
minutes.  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
[6] Select “Start” with [2] and press [ENTER].  
Format Disc  
[6] Select “Start” with [2] and press [ENTER].  
Finalize  
g
Protected contents will also be erased.  
Are you sure you want to continue?  
Finalizing is necessary to enable playback  
of the disc on compatible DVD players.  
You will be unable to record on this disc  
once it is finalized.  
tin  
Ed  
Start  
Cancel  
Are you sure you want to continue?  
Start  
Cancel  
Formatting starts.  
A message appears when formatting is finished.  
Finalizing starts.  
Note  
You cannot cancel finalizing.  
Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however it may take  
up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).  
A message appears when finalizing is finished.  
Note  
Do not disconnect the AC power supply cord while  
formatting. This can render the disc unusable.  
Finalizing takes about 15 minutes.  
Do not disconnect the AC power supply cord while  
finalizing. This can render the disc unusable.  
[7] Press [ENTER].  
[7] Press [ENTER].  
To stop formatting [RAM]  
Press [RETURN].  
You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc  
must be reformatted if you do this.  
Note  
You can only finalize DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +R  
that were recorded on the unit.  
Note  
When finalizing a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take  
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately  
4 times).  
When a disc has been formatted using this unit, it may not be  
possible to use it on any other equipment.  
DVD-R, +R and CD-R/RW cannot be formatted.  
You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.  
The disc cannot be formatted if the write protect tab (l 30) is  
switched to “PROTECT”. Release the protection to continue.  
The message “Unable to format” appears when trying to format  
discs the unit cannot use.  
After finalizing  
- The disc becomes play-only and you can no longer record or edit  
it. [-R] [+R]  
- You can record and edit the disc after formatting (l left) although  
it becomes play-only after finalizing. [-RW‹V›]  
- DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +R finalized on the unit  
may not be playable on other players depending on the condition  
of the recording.  
1 Playback will start with:  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “DISC MANAGEMENT”.  
- There is a pause of several seconds between titles and chapters  
during play.  
- Titles are divided into about 5-minute chapters°.  
° This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode  
of recording.  
Select whether to show the top menu after finalizing the disc. Do this  
before finalizing the disc.  
[4] Select “Playback will start with:” with [3, 4]  
and press [ENTER].  
[5] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item and press  
Visit Panasonic’s homepage for more information about DVDs.  
For U.S.A.:  
http://www.panasonic.com/playDVD-R  
[ENTER].  
Playback will start with:  
Top Menu  
First Title  
Top Menu: The top menu appears first.  
First Title: The disc content is played without displaying the  
top menu.  
31  
VQT0N92  
           
Editing  
DVD  
[2] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character you  
want to enter and press [ENTER].  
Repeat this step to enter other characters.  
To erase a character  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
POWER  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field  
and press [;, PAUSE].  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
VHS  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
DVD  
Using the numeric buttons to enter characters  
e.g., entering the letter “R”.  
5
6
7
8
J
K
N
Q
U
L
O
R
V
Numeric  
buttons  
7
7
(1)Press [7] to move to the 7th row.  
(2)Press [7] twice to highlight “R”.  
(3)Press [ENTER].  
7
M
P
T
AUDIO  
S
CANCEL/RESET  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
To enter space  
SLOW/  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
Press [CANCEL/RESET, ¢] and press  
[ENTER].  
:, 9  
PLAY  
Save/recall phrased (l below)  
;
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
[3] After you have finished naming  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
Press [, STOP].  
The title is entered and the screen disappears.  
3, 4, 2, 1  
ENTER  
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
To cancel in the middle  
Press [RETURN].  
Characters will not be saved.  
S
RETURN  
SUB MENU  
SCHEDULE  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
JET REW  
To save phrases  
You can save frequently used phrases and recall them later.  
Maximum number of saved phrases: 20  
Entering text  
Maximum number of characters per phrase: 20  
After entering the phrase (step 1–2, “Entering text”)  
[1] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Phrase Save” and press  
You can also press [9, SKIP] to select “Phrase Save”.  
[2] Press [2, 1] to select “Save” and press [ENTER].  
Press [RETURN] to cancel.  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.  
The maximum number of characters:  
[RAM]  
Title  
Title (scheduled recording)  
Playlist  
Disc  
Characters  
44  
64  
64  
To recall a saved phrases  
[1] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Phrase List” and press  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
Title  
Disc  
Characters  
[ENTER].  
44  
40  
You can also press [:, SKIP] to select “Phrase List”.  
[2] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the phrase to be recalled and  
press [ENTER].  
Note  
If a name is long, only part of it is displayed on the title list (l 33)  
and the playlist screen (l 37).  
To erase saved phrases  
[1] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Phrase List” and press  
Preparation  
[ENTER].  
Insert a recorded disc.  
You can also press [:, SKIP] to select “Phrase List”.  
[2] Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the phrase to be erased.  
[3] Press [SUB MENU] to show “Erase Phrase” and press  
[ENTER].  
Release protection (Disc l 30, title l 34, cartridge l 30). [RAM]  
Press [DVD].  
[1] Show Enter Name screen.  
Refer to the following pages regarding display of the Enter Name  
Screen.  
[4] Press [2, 1] to select “Erase” and press [ENTER].  
[5] Press [RETURN].  
Title  
(l 34)  
Title (scheduled recording)  
Disc  
Playlist  
(l 28, 29)  
(l 30)  
(l 38)  
For your reference  
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the TOP MENU  
after finalization (l 31). When entering a title name, the name that  
will appear in the TOP MENU can be previewed in “Top Menu  
Preview (Finalized Disc)” window. [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
Name field: shows the text you have entered  
Title Name  
_
Title Name  
_
Top Menu Preview  
1
2
3
4
1
A
D
G
2
B
E
H
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
d
g
6
b
e
h
7
c
f
8
i
/
9
j
l
$
0
(Finalized Disc)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
A
D
G
J
2
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
,
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
6
b
e
7
c
f
8
i
/
9
j
l
$
0
%
&
i
d
g
j
%
&
h
k
i
O
[
L
O
R
V
Y
?
l
N
]
@
_
;
π
Erase  
m
n
o
M
P
T
Phrase Save  
S
p
t
q
u
x
'
r
s
{
(
)
-
v
}
W
.
Z
!
w
"
y
:
z
;
|
\
Set  
^
`
Space  
ENTER  
32  
VQT0N92  
   
Editing  
DVD  
Using the Direct Navigator  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [-RW‹VR›]  
Editing titles with SUB MENU button  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] and the list of titles recorded (Title  
View) is shown. You can play and edit a desired title.  
Note  
Once erased, divided or shortened, the title cannot be restored to  
its original state. Make certain before proceeding.  
For your reference  
You cannot edit during recording or transferring (dubbing), etc.  
The maximum number of items on a disc:  
Preparation  
- Title:  
99 ([+R] 49 titles)  
Release protection (disc l 30, cartridge l 30). [RAM]  
Press [DVD].  
- Chapter: Approximately 1000 ([+R] Approximately 254)  
(Depends on the state of recording.)  
[1] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
Erase Title  
Selecting recorded titles to play  
Preparation  
Insert a disc that has been recorded on.  
Press [DVD].  
[2] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a desired  
Properties  
Edit Title  
title.  
“To show other pages”, l below  
View Chapters  
[3] Press [SUB MENU].  
[1] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
[4] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item  
and press [ENTER].  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Title View  
DVD-RAM  
-
-
After this operation, follow the desired operation.  
07  
08  
g
10 10/25 Mon  
8
10/25 Mon  
To stop in the middle  
-
-
-
-
-
-
Ed  
Press [RETURN].  
For your reference  
Previous  
Page 02/02  
Next  
When the title is protected (l 34), some items are not accessible.  
Release the protection to access the inaccessible items. [RAM]  
Play  
Select Previous  
Next  
SUB MENU  
[2] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title you want to  
1 Erase Title  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] (Multiple editing is possible. l below)  
watch and press [ENTER].  
Play starts.  
You can also select titles by entering a 2-digit number with the  
numeric buttons.  
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Editing titles with SUB MENU button”.  
Once title is erased using this procedure, it cannot be retrieved.  
Check the title carefully before erasing to ensure it isn’t one you want  
to keep.  
e.g.:  
“5”: [0] )[5]  
“15”: [1] )[5]  
If you enter a number larger than the total number of titles, the  
last title is selected.  
“To show other pages” l lower right  
[4] Select “Erase title” with  
Erase Title  
[3, 4] and press  
Time remaining after erase 0 : 58(SP)  
[ENTER].  
[5] Select “Erase” with [2]  
Corresponding playlist chapters will be erased.  
Erase  
Cancel  
To clear the title list  
Press [RETURN].  
and press [ENTER].  
ENTER  
For your reference  
Direct Navigator screen icons  
For your reference  
The disc’s available recording time may not increase after erasing  
short titles.  
The available recording space on DVD-R or +R does not increase  
when you erase titles.  
Available recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)  
increases only when the last recorded title is erased. It does not  
increase if other title are erased.  
: Title protected  
: Copy-protected so it was not recorded.  
t: Unable to play  
¥: Currently recording  
: Title with “One time only recording” restriction (l 64, CPRM)  
1 Properties  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [-RW‹VR›]  
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Editing titles with SUB MENU button”.  
Title information (e.g., date and  
time) is shown.  
Properties  
Football  
01  
[4] Select “Properties” with  
[3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
No.  
Date  
Ch.  
Start  
Rec.  
1:02 PM  
(
)
12/ 7/2005 Tue  
12  
1:00 SP  
ENTER  
Various operations  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press  
[ENTER].  
You can also press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP] to show other  
pages.  
Multiple editing  
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;, PAUSE]. (Repeat)  
A check mark appears. Press [;, PAUSE] again to cancel.  
33  
VQT0N92  
                     
Editing  
DVD  
For your reference  
Titles will be erased even if they are protected if you format the disc  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
POWER  
with DISC MANAGEMENT (l 31).  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
11 Shorten Title  
[RAM]  
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.  
OPER  
SELECT  
ATION
VHS  
DVD  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
SLOW/  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
PLAY  
:, 9  
You can remove unnecessary parts of the title such as commercials.  
[4] Select “Shorten Title”  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Shorten Title  
1
DVD-RAM  
with [3, 4] and press  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
08  
Play  
Start  
End  
[ENTER].  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
Next  
[5] Press [ENTER] at the  
start point and end  
point of the section  
you want to erase.  
(l 35, “For quicker editing”)  
Exit  
3, 4, 2, 1  
0:43.21  
ENTER  
Start  
End  
SUB MENU  
TIME SLIP  
- -:- -.- -  
- -:- -.- -  
S
ENTER  
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
SCHEDULE  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
JET REW  
Shorten Title  
[6] Select “Exit” with [3,  
4] and press [ENTER].  
[7] Select “Erase” with [2]  
and press [ENTER].  
Time remaining after erase  
0 : 58(SP)  
Corresponding playlist chapters will be erased.  
Erase Cancel  
1 Edit Title  
You can perform various kinds of title editing.  
Preparation  
To erase another part of the same title  
After setting the point in “Start” and “End”, select “Next” in step 5 and  
perform step 7, then repeat steps 5–7.  
Release protection (disc l 30, cartridge l 30). [RAM]  
Press [DVD].  
[1] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] and use [3, 4, 2,  
For your reference  
You may not be able to specify start and end points within  
3 seconds of each other.  
The disc’s available recording time may not increase after erasing  
short parts of titles.  
1] to select a desired title.  
“To show other pages” l 33  
“Multiple editing” l 33  
[2] Press [SUB MENU].  
e.g.: DVD-RAM  
Title Name  
Setup Protection  
Cancel Protection  
Shorten Title  
11 Change Thumbnail  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.  
[3] Select “Edit Title” with [3, 4] and  
press [ENTER].  
[4] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item  
You can change the image to be shown as a thumbnail picture in the  
Title View.  
and press [ENTER].  
Change Thumbnail  
Divide Title  
The editing screen for the selected item appears.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail  
[4] Select “Change  
DVD-RAM  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
Thumbnail” with  
[3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
08  
;
Change  
Exit  
To exit the screen  
Press [RETURN].  
0:00.00  
[5] Press [1, PLAY] to  
play.  
Start play and select  
the thumbnail position.  
Change  
0:00.00  
11 Title Name  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.  
ENTER  
[6] Press [ENTER] at the  
point you want to  
display.  
[4] Select “Title Name” with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
(l 35, “For quicker editing”)  
To change to another point in the same title:  
- Select “Change” with [3, 4] and press [1, PLAY] and then  
repeat step 6.  
Refer to “Entering text”. (l 32)  
11 Setup Protection/Cancel Protection  
[7] Select “Exit” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].  
[RAM] (Multiple editing l 33)  
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.  
The thumbnail picture will be changed at this point.  
You can prevent accidental erasure of titles by setting and canceling  
the write-protection.  
[4] Select “Setup Protection” or “Cancel  
Protection” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].  
[5] Select “Yeswith [2] and press [ENTER].  
Setup Protection  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
DVD-RAM  
Set title protection.  
07  
Set up Protection:  
The padlock mark  
appears.  
Yes  
No  
10 10/25 Mon  
- -  
ENTER  
Cancel Protection  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
DVD-RAM  
Cancel title protection.  
Yes No  
07  
Cancel Protection:  
The padlock mark  
disappears.  
10 10/25 Mon  
- -  
ENTER  
34  
VQT0N92  
         
Editing  
DVD  
11 Divide Title  
11 Erase Chapter  
[RAM]  
[RAM] (Multiple editing l 33)  
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Edit Title”.  
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “View Chapters”.  
You can divide a selected title into two. You must be careful when  
dividing a title because it cannot be recovered after the procedure.  
Once erased, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be  
restored. Make certain before proceeding.  
[4] Select “Divide Title”  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Divide Title  
[6] Select “Erase Chapter” with [3, 4] and press  
DVD-RAM  
with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
[5] Press [ENTER] at the  
point you want to divide  
[ENTER].  
08  
;
Preview  
Divide  
[7] Select “Erase” with [2] and press [ENTER].  
Exit  
Erase Chapter  
0:00.05  
Erase chapter from the title?  
Corresponding playlist chapters will also be erased.  
Divide  
the title.  
(l lower right, “For quicker  
editing”)  
To change the point to  
divide:  
- Select “Divide” with [3, 4]  
and press [1, PLAY], and  
then repeat steps 5–7.  
0:00.05  
ENTER  
Erase  
Cancel  
Divide Title  
11 Create Chapter  
Once divided, this title  
cannot be recombined.  
[RAM]  
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “View Chapters”.  
Divide  
Cancel  
[6] Select “Create Chapter” with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
[6] Select “Exit” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].  
g
[7] Press [ENTER] at the point you want to divide.  
[7] Select “Divide” with [2] and press [ENTER].  
tin  
(l below, “For quicker editing”)  
The title is divided at that point.  
Ed  
Repeat this step to divide at other points.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter  
DVD-RAM  
To check the division point  
By selecting “Preview” in step 5 and pressing [ENTER], play will begin from  
08  
PLAY  
Create  
10 seconds prior to the division point to 10 seconds after the division point.  
For your reference  
Exit  
0:43.21  
The divided titles retain the name of the original title. They also  
retain the CPRM property (l 64) of the original.  
Video and audio just before and after the division point will be  
momentarily cut out.  
It is not possible to carry out “Divide” in the following cases:  
- When the resulting part(s) are extremely short.  
- When the total number of titles is more than 99.  
[8] Select “Exit” with [4] and press [ENTER].  
Note  
A short portion of the recording just after the creation point may be  
lost.  
For your reference  
1 View Chapters  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
The divided titles retain the name of the original title. They also  
retain the CPRM property (l 64) of the original.  
It is not possible to carry out “Create” when the resulting part(s) are  
extremely short.  
[1] Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] and use [3, 4, 2,  
1] to select a desired title.  
“To show other pages” l 33  
[2] Press [SUB MENU].  
11 Combine Chapters  
[RAM]  
e.g.: DVD-RAM  
[3] Select “View Chapters” with [3, 4]  
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “View Chapters”.  
and press [ENTER].  
Erase Chapter  
Create Chapter  
Combine Chapters  
[6] Select “Combine Chapters” with [3, 4] and  
press [ENTER].  
[4] Select a desired chapter with [  
3
,
4
,
2,  
1].  
To start play l Press [ENTER].  
[7] Select “Combine” with [2] and press [ENTER].  
To edit l Follow the steps below.  
View Titles  
The selected chapter and next chapter are combined.  
[5] Press [SUB MENU].  
[6] Select a desired item with [3, 4]  
Combine Chapters  
Selected Chapter  
Following Chapter  
001  
002  
and press [ENTER].  
Combine chapters.  
Title/Chapter  
Combine  
Cancel  
Programs are recorded as a single title consisting of one chapter.  
Title  
ENTER  
11 View Titles  
Chapter  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [-RW‹VR›]  
Start  
End  
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “View Chapters”.  
[6] Select “View Titles” with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
You can divide a title into multiple chapters. [RAM]  
(l 22, “Create chapters”, l right “Create Chapter”)  
Title  
You go back to Title View.  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
You can change the order of chapters and create a playlist.  
[RAM]  
For quicker editing  
Use search (l 21), Time Slip (l 22) or slow-motion (l 21) to  
find the desired point.  
Press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP] to skip to the end of a title.  
Titles are divided into chapters about 5 minutes after finalizing  
(l 31). [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
35  
VQT0N92  
         
Editing  
DVD  
Creating playlists  
[RAM]  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
POWER  
Preparation  
Release protection (disc l 30, cartridge l 30)  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
Press [DVD].  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
VHS  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
DVD  
FUNCT  
IONS  
[1] While stopped  
DVD  
DVD-RAM  
Cartridge Protection Off  
Disc Protection Off  
Press [FUNCTIONS].  
[2] Select “Other  
Playback  
Schedule  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
PLAYLISTS  
Numeric  
buttons  
FLEXIBLE RECORDING  
SETUP  
SCHEDULE  
VCR Plus+  
AUDIO  
2
1
3
DISC MANAGEMENT  
Functions” with [3, 4]  
and press [ENTER].  
[3] Select “PLAYLISTS”  
with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
CANCEL/RESET  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
Dubbing  
DUBBING  
SLOW/  
ENTER  
Other Functions  
Return  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
PLAY  
The Playlist View appears.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
PLAYLISTS  
DVD-RAM  
PlayList View  
FUNCTIONS  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
3, 4, 2, 1  
Create  
ENTER  
-
-
-
-
-
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
S
RETURN  
SUB MENU  
Previous  
Page 01/01  
Next  
SCHEDULE  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
JET REW  
Play  
REC  
REC MODE DVD ERASE ADD/DLT  
CREATE  
[4] Select “Create” with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press  
DVD ERASE  
COPYING  
VHS  
[ENTER].  
VCR/TV  
CHAPTER  
DVD  
[5] Use [2, 1] to select the source title and press  
[4].  
PLAYLISTS  
DVD-RAM  
Create  
Using playlist  
[RAM]  
01  
4
10/25 Mon  
Source Title  
01  
Page 01/01  
02  
You can create a playlist by gathering your favorite chapters (l 35)  
Page 001/001  
Source Chapter  
001  
002  
003  
from your recordings. You can also play and edit the created playlist.  
When you want to select all chapters in the title, use [2, 1] to  
select the source title and press [ENTER], then skip to step 7.  
Repeat steps 5–7 to add other titles or chapters.  
Playlist  
Title  
Title  
Chapter Chapter  
[6] Use [2, 1] to select the chapter you want to  
add to a playlist and press [ENTER].  
Press [3] to cancel.  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
001/001  
Source Chapter  
001  
002  
003  
Insert position  
Page 001/001  
You can also create a new chapter in the source title.  
Press [SUB MENU] to select “Create Chapter” and press  
[ENTER] (l 35, “Create Chapter”).  
Playlist  
Chapter  
Chapter  
[7] Use [2, 1] to select the position to insert the  
Editing playlists doesn’t modify titles.  
Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much  
capacity.  
chapter and press [ENTER].  
Chapters in Playlists  
Chapters in Playlists  
001  
001/001  
The maximum number of items on a disc:  
- Playlists: 99  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Press RETURN to exit.  
SUB MENU  
- Chapters in play lists:  
The chapter is registered in the playlist.  
Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.  
Approximately 1000 (Depends on the state of recording.)  
To select other source titles, press [3] several times to return  
to step 5.  
If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the  
items entered will not be recorded.  
[8] Press [RETURN].  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [RETURN].  
36  
VQT0N92  
       
Editing  
DVD  
Playing playlists  
Using playlist to edit playlists/chapters  
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] (Play only)  
Preparation  
Create playlists. (l 36)  
Press [DVD].  
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] (Properties only)  
Preparation  
Create playlists. (l 36)  
Release protection (disc l 30, cartridge l 30). [RAM]  
Press [DVD].  
[1] While stopped  
Press [FUNCTIONS].  
[1] While stopped  
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press  
Press [FUNCTIONS].  
[ENTER].  
[2] Select “Other Functions” with [3, 4] and press  
[3] Select “PLAYLISTS” with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
[ENTER].  
[3] Select “PLAYLISTS” with [3, 4] and press  
PLAYLISTS  
Playlist View  
08  
[ENTER].  
DVD-RAM  
07  
-
-
[4] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a  
Erase Playlist  
10/25 Mon 0:30  
10/25 Mon 0:01  
Create  
playlist.  
“To show other pages” l 33  
Properties  
-
-
-
-
-
-
Edit  
[5] Press [SUB MENU].  
[6] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item  
View Chapters  
Previous  
Page 02/02  
Select  
Next  
Previous  
Play  
SUB MENU  
Next  
g
and press [ENTER].  
[4] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a playlist and press  
Ed  
[ENTER].  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
Chapters are not displayed if you have not yet created a playlist  
with the disc.  
To exit the screen  
Press [RETURN].  
You can also select a playlist from the Playlist View by entering  
a 2-digit number with the numeric buttons.  
e.g.:  
“5”: [0] )[5]  
1 Erase Playlist  
[RAM] (Multiple editing l 33)  
“15”: [1] )[5]  
If you enter a number larger than the total number of playlists,  
the last playlist is selected.  
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Using playlist to edit playlists/chapters”.  
“To show other pages” l 33  
[6] Select “Erase Playlist” with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
To stop playlist play  
Press [, STOP]. (The Playlist View screen appears.)  
[7] Select “Erase” with [2] and press [ENTER].  
The playlist is erased.  
To return to the previous screen  
Erase Playlist  
Press [RETURN].  
Erase playlist?  
To exit the screen  
Press [RETURN].  
ENTER  
To erase a playlist during play  
[1] Press [DVD ERASE].  
A confirmation message will be displayed.  
[2] Use [2] to select “Erase” and press [ENTER].  
Once a playlist has been erased, it cannot be restored. Check  
carefully before proceeding.  
Even if you erase the playlist, the original title is not erased.  
For your reference  
You can use fast-forward, fast-rewind, pause, and slow-motion  
while playing chapters just as you can during normal play.  
1 Properties  
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›]  
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Using playlist to edit playlists/chapters”.  
[6] Select “Properties” with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
Playlist information (e.g., date and length) is shown.  
Properties  
Dinosaur  
No.  
Chapters  
03  
004  
Date  
Length  
11/15/2005 Tue  
0:05.51  
ENTER  
37  
VQT0N92  
               
Editing  
DVD  
1 Edit  
[RAM]  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
POWER  
VOLUME  
CH  
You can perform various kinds of playlist editing.  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
Preparation  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
VHS  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
Create playlists (l 36).  
Release protection (disc l 30, cartridge l 30).  
Press [DVD].  
DVD  
Numeric  
buttons  
FUNCT  
IONS  
[1] While stopped  
Press [FUNCTIONS].  
[2] Select “Other  
DVD  
DVD-RAM  
Cartridge Protection Off  
Disc Protection Off  
AUDIO  
Playback  
Schedule  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
PLAYLISTS  
CANCEL/RESET  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
FLEXIBLE RECORDING  
SETUP  
SCHEDULE  
VCR Plus+  
SLOW/  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
2
1
3
DISC MANAGEMENT  
Functions” with [3, 4]  
and press [ENTER].  
[3] Select “PLAYLISTS”  
with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
Dubbing  
DUBBING  
PLAY  
1
ENTER  
Other Functions  
Return  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
Chapters are not displayed if you have not yet created a playlist  
3, 4, 2, 1  
on the disc.  
ENTER  
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
[4] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a playlist.  
“To show other pages” l 33  
[5] Press [SUB MENU],  
S
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
SCHEDULE  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
JET REW  
Erase Playlist  
Properties  
Edit  
Create  
Copy  
then select “Edit”  
with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
Playlist Name  
Change Thumbnail  
View Chapters  
[6] Use [3, 4] to select a  
desired item and  
press [ENTER].  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [RETURN].  
11 Create  
11 Change Thumbnail  
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Edit”.  
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Edit”.  
You can change the image to be shown as a thumbnail picture in the  
Playlist View.  
[6] Select “Create” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].  
Refer to “Creating playlists”, steps 5–8. (l 36)  
PLAYLISTS  
Change Thumbnail  
[6] Select “Change  
Thumbnail” with [3,  
4] and press [ENTER].  
[7] Press [1, PLAY] to  
play.  
DVD-RAM  
11 Copy  
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Edit”.  
08  
;
Change  
(Multiple editing l 33)  
Exit  
0:00.00  
[6] Select “Copy” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].  
Start play and select  
the thumbnail position.  
Change  
0:00.00  
[7] Select “Copy” with [2] and press [ENTER].  
[8] Press [ENTER] at the  
point you want to  
display.  
Copy  
ENTER  
Copy this playlist?  
Copy  
Cancel  
(l 35, “For quicker editing”)  
To change to another point in the same title:  
- Select “Change” with [3, 4] and press [1, PLAY], and then  
repeat step 8.  
ENTER  
11 Playlist Name  
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Edit”.  
[9] Select “Exit” with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].  
The displayed scene is changed at this point.  
[6] Select “Playlist Name” with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
Refer to “Entering text”. (l 32)  
38  
VQT0N92  
         
Editing  
DVD  
11 Create Chapter  
1 View Chapters  
[RAM]  
Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.  
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] (Play only)  
Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Edit”.  
You can play/edit the chapters in a playlist.  
[8] Select “Create Chapter” with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
[5] Press [SUB MENU], and select “View Chapters”  
with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].  
[6] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a desired chapter.  
You can also select a chapter from the chapter view by  
entering a 3-digit number with the numeric buttons.  
[9] Press [ENTER] at the point you want to divide.  
(l 35, “For quicker editing”)  
PLAYLISTS  
Create Chapter  
Play  
DVD-RAM  
Create  
08  
e.g.:  
“5”: [0] )[0] )[5]  
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]  
Exit  
If you enter a number larger than the total number of chapters,  
the last chapter is selected.  
0:43.21  
Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles  
and source chapters.  
“To show other pages” l 33  
ENTER  
Repeat this step to divide at other points.  
[10] Select “Exit” with [4] and press [ENTER].  
[7] Press [SUB MENU].  
Add Chapter  
[8] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item  
Move Chapter  
Note  
and press [ENTER].  
Create Chapter  
g
A short portion of the recording just after the creation point may be  
lost.  
Combine Chapters  
Erase Chapter  
tin  
Ed  
For your reference  
View Playlists  
The divided titles retain the name of the original title. They also  
retain the CPRM property (l 64) of the original.  
It is not possible to carry out “Create” when the resulting part(s) are  
extremely short.  
To play a chapter  
Press [ENTER] after step 5.  
11 Combine Chapters  
[RAM]  
Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.  
To stop chapter play  
Press [, STOP]. (The Chapter View screen appears.)  
11 Add Chapter  
[RAM]  
Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.  
[8] Select “Combine Chapter” with [3, 4] and  
press [ENTER].  
[9] Select “Combine” with [2] and press [ENTER].  
The selected chapter and next chapter are combined.  
[8] Select “Add Chapter” with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
Refer to “Creating playlists”, steps 5–8. (l 36)  
Combine Chapters  
Selected Chapter  
Following Chapter  
001  
002  
Combine chapters.  
Combine  
11 Move Chapter  
Cancel  
[RAM]  
ENTER  
Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.  
11 Erase Chapter  
[RAM]  
Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.  
[8] Select “Move Chapter” with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
[9] Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position to insert  
(Multiple editing l 33)  
Once erased, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be  
restored. Make certain before proceeding.  
the chapter and press [ENTER].  
The chapter is moved and inserted before the highlighted  
chapter.  
[8] Select “Erase Chapter” with [3, 4] and press  
PLAYLISTS  
Move Chapter  
DVD-RAM  
08  
10/25 Mon 0:01  
002  
[ENTER].  
sss  
sss  
001  
003  
[9] Select “Erase” with [2] and press [ENTER].  
Even if you erase the chapter, the original title is not erased.  
Erase Chapter  
sss  
sss  
sss  
sss  
sss  
sss  
sss  
Previous  
Page 02/02  
Next  
Erase chapter from playlist?  
ENTER  
Erase  
Cancel  
ENTER  
11 View Playlists  
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›]  
Follow steps 1 to 7 of “View Chapters”.  
[8] Select “View Playlists” with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
You go back to Playlist View.  
39  
VQT0N92  
   
Convenient functions  
DVD  
Using DISPLAY menus  
Common procedures  
Preparation  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
POWER  
Press [DVD].  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
[1] Press [DISPLAY].  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
Disc  
Play  
Video  
Audio  
VHS  
DVD  
Î Digital 2/0ch  
1
Soundtrack  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
Off  
Subtitle  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
Stereo  
Audio channel  
VHS MENU  
RETURN  
Other  
3, 4, 1  
SUB MENU  
Menu  
Item  
Setting  
S
TIME SLIP  
JET REW  
[2] Select a menu with [3, 4] and press [1].  
SCHEDULE  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
[3] Select an item with [3, 4] and press [1].  
DISPLAY  
REC  
REC MODE DVD ERASE ADD/DLT  
CREATE  
[4] Select a setting with [3, 4].  
Different operations are required depending on settings. Follow  
the on-screen instructions.  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]  
To exit the screen  
Press [DISPLAY].  
For your reference  
The screens depend on the disc contents.  
Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped, etc.) and  
the type of software you are playing, there are some items that you  
cannot select or change.  
1 Disc menu  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]  
[A] Sound track/Subtitle language  
ENG: English  
FRA: French  
DEU: German  
ITA: Italian  
ESP: Spanish  
NLD: Dutch  
SVE: Swedish  
NOR: Norwegian  
DAN: Danish  
POR: Portuguese  
RUS: Russian  
JPN: Japanese  
CHI: Chinese  
KOR: Korean  
MAL: Malay  
Disc  
Play  
Video  
Audio  
Other  
Î Digital 2/0ch  
Off  
Stereo  
1
Soundtrack  
Subtitle  
VIE:  
Vietnamese  
Audio channel  
THA: Thai  
¢:  
Others  
Soundtrack  
[B] Audio attributes  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [-RW‹VR›]  
The disc’s audio attributes appear.  
LPCM/PPCM/Î Digital/DTS/MPEG: Signal type  
k (kHz):  
b (bit):  
Sampling frequency  
Number of bits  
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]  
ch (channel):  
Number of channels  
Select the audio and language. (See [B] Audio attributes)  
Subtitle  
For your reference  
The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot  
make a change when there is no recording.  
Some discs allow changes to sound tracks, subtitles, and angles  
only by using the disc’s setup menus (l 21).  
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]  
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (See [A] Sound  
track/Subtitle language)  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [-RW‹VR›] (Only disc that contain subtitle  
on/off information)  
Turn the subtitle on/off.  
Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.  
If the subtitles overlap the closed captions recorded on discs,  
turn the subtitles off.  
Audio channel [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]  
l 23, Changing audio during play  
Angle [DVD-A] [DVD-V]  
Change the number to select an angle.  
STILL-P (Still picture) [DVD-A]  
Selects the play method for still pictures.  
Slide Show: Plays according to the default order on the disc.  
Page:  
Select the still picture number and play.  
RANDOM: Plays in random order.  
Return:  
Returns to the default still picture on the disc.  
PBC (Playback control) [VCD] (l 64)  
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.  
40  
VQT0N92  
                         
Convenient functions  
DVD  
1 Play menu  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]  
Title,.Chapter,.Off  
Disc  
Off  
Repeat Play  
^------------------------J  
Play  
[VCD] [CD] (excluding MP3 discs)  
Track,.All,.Off  
Video  
Audio  
Other  
^----------------J  
[DVD-A] [CD] (MP3 discs only)  
Track,.Group,.Off  
^-----------------------J  
Repeat play  
This function works only when the elapsed play time is  
displayed.  
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items  
that can be selected will differ.  
While playing a playlist  
[RAM]  
Playlists,.Off  
^-----------------J  
1 Video menu  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]  
°Transfer (When “Progressive” is set to “On”)  
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit  
the type of material being played (l 64, Film and Video).  
Auto1 (normal):  
Detects 24 frame-per-second film content and  
appropriately converts it.  
Auto2: Compatible with 30 frame-per-second film content in  
addition to 24 frame-per-second film content.  
Video: Select when the video content is distorted by using  
Auto1 and Auto2.  
Disc  
Play  
Video  
Audio  
Other  
Normal  
On  
Picture  
MPEG-DNR  
Progressive  
Line-in NR  
On  
Auto 1  
Automatic  
Transfer  
Picture  
nt  
s
n
To select the picture mode during play  
Normal: Default setting  
e
i
n
tio  
nc  
Soft:  
Fine:  
Soft picture with fewer video artifacts  
Details are sharper  
nve  
Line-in NR (Only when IN1, IN2 or TP is selected)  
Reduces video tape noise during transfer (dub).  
Depending on the software, jittering may occur.  
Automatic:  
Cinema: Mellows movies, enhances detail in dark scenes.  
MPEG-DNR  
Noise reduction only works on picture input from a  
video tape.  
Reduces noise and picture degradation.  
On()Off  
On:  
Off:  
Noise reduction works for any video input.  
Noise reduction is off. Select when you want to record  
input as is.  
°Progressive (l 64)  
Select “On” to enable progressive output.  
Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.  
When progressive output is on, closed captions cannot be  
displayed.  
° Only when you have selected “480p” in “TV Type” (l 19).  
On()Off  
1 Audio menu  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]  
Note  
Disc  
Play  
Video  
Audio  
Other  
Turn V.S.S. off if it causes distortion.  
V.S.S. does not work for SAP recordings.  
Off  
Off  
V.S.S.  
Dialog Enhancer  
Dialog Enhancer  
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-V] [DVD-A] [-RW‹VR›]  
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a center  
channel)  
V.S.S.  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]  
The volume of the center channel is raised to make dialog easier  
(Only for Dolby Digital with 2.0 or more channels)  
to hear.  
Enjoy a surround-sound effect if you are using 2 front speakers  
(L/R) only.  
On()Off  
Natural()Emphasis()Off  
^------------------------------------------J  
1 Other menu  
Position  
Disc  
Play  
Video  
Audio  
Other  
To change the display position  
1 (Standard) –5:  
The higher the setting the lower the screen moves.  
1
Position  
41  
VQT0N92  
                     
Convenient functions  
DVD  
Entering a password (Ratings)  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
POWER  
You can limit play of DVDs unsuitable for some audiences (children,  
for example). Play and changes to the settings are not possible  
unless you enter a password.  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
VHS  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
DVD  
Preparation  
Press [DVD].  
Numeric  
buttons  
When setting ratings  
The password screen is shown when you select levels 0 to 7.  
[1] Input a 4-digit password with the numeric buttons.  
If you enter a wrong number, press [2] to erase it before you  
press [ENTER].  
AUDIO  
CANCEL/RESET  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
SLOW/  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
Do not forget your password.  
[2] Press [ENTER].  
PLAY  
[3] Press [ENTER].  
The password is entered and the unit is locked.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
RETURN  
Now, when you insert a DVD-Video that exceeds the ratings limit you  
set, a message appears on the TV.  
Follow the on-screen instructions.  
3, 4, 2, 1  
ENTER  
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
When changing ratings  
S
The password screen is shown when you select “Ratings”. (l 43)  
[1] Input a 4-digit password with the numeric buttons and press  
[ENTER].  
SCHEDULE  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
JET REW  
Unlock Recorder: To unlock the unit and return the rating to 8  
Change Password: To change your password  
Changing the unit’s settings  
Preparation  
Change Level:  
To change the rating level  
Press [DVD].  
Temporary Unlock: To temporarily unlock the unit (the unit locks  
again if you switch it to standby or open the  
disc tray)  
Common procedures  
Use the following procedure to change the settings if necessary.  
[2] Select a desired item with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].  
Actual screens depend on the operation. Follow the on-screen  
instructions.  
FUNCTIONS  
[1] While stopped  
DVD  
DVD-RAM  
Cartridge Protection Off  
Disc Protection Off  
Press [FUNCTIONS].  
Playback  
Schedule  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
PLAYLISTS  
FLEXIBLE RECORDING  
[2] Select “Other  
SETUP  
SCHEDULE  
VCR Plus+  
2
1
3
DISC MANAGEMENT  
Functions” with [3, 4]  
and press [ENTER].  
Dubbing  
ENTER  
DUBBING  
Other Functions  
Return  
[3] Select “SETUP” with  
[3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
SETUP  
Off Timer  
6 Hours  
Remote Control Code  
Clock Settings  
Set Code 1  
Channel  
Setup  
Quick Start  
On  
(1) Menus  
(2) Items  
(3) Options  
Restore Default Settings  
Disc  
Video  
Audio  
Display  
TV Screen  
[4] Select a menu with [3, 4] and press [2, 1].  
[5] Select an item to be changed with [3, 4] and  
press [ENTER].  
[6] Select an option with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
Some options require different operations. Follow the displayed  
instructions.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN]. Even if you have changed an option, the change is  
not activated until you press [ENTER].  
To exit the screen  
Press [RETURN] several times.  
For your reference  
The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.  
42  
VQT0N92  
         
Convenient functions  
DVD  
Disc  
Summary of settings  
This description shows the initial settings for the unit. For  
Settings for Playback  
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.  
details on menu operation. (l 42)  
Underlined items are the factory default settings.  
Ratings (l 42)  
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.  
Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)  
[8 No Limit]: All DVD-Video can be played.  
/
indicates settings effective for both DVD and VHS.  
indicates settings effective for DVD only.  
[1] to [7]:  
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding  
ratings recorded on them.  
Channel  
/
[0 Lock All]: Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.  
Signal Source (RF IN) (l 17)  
Select to suit the type of antenna you are using.  
[Antenna] [CableTV]  
Changing ratings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)  
[Unlock Recorder] [Change Password]  
[Change Level] [Temporary Unlock]  
Set Channels Automatically (l 17)  
Preset Channel Captions (l 18)  
Manual Channel Captions (l 18)  
VCR Plusi Ch. Setting (l 17)  
Play DVD-Audio in Video Mode  
Select “Video Mode (Video On)” to play DVD-Video content on  
some DVD-Audio.  
[Video Mode (Video On)] [Audio Mode (Video Off)]  
Video Mode The setting returns to “Audio Mode (Video Off)”  
(Video ON)  
when you change the disc or turn the unit off.  
Setup  
/
Off Timer  
Audio Language  
[English] [French] [Spanish] [Original] [Other ¢¢¢¢]  
Select how long the unit remains on when it is not being used.  
[2 Hours] [6 Hours] [Off]  
Subtitle Language  
[Automatic] [English] [French] [Spanish] [Other ¢¢¢¢]  
Remote Control Code (l 19)  
[Set Code 1] [Set Code 2] [Set Code 3]  
Menu Language  
[English] [French] [Spanish] [Other ¢¢¢¢]  
nt  
s
n
Clock Settings  
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.  
e
i
n
tio  
Choose the language for audio, subtitles and disc menus. [DVD-V]  
If a language which is not recorded is selected, or if languages  
are already fixed on the disc, the language set as the default on  
the disc will be played instead.  
nc  
nve  
Set Clock Automatically (l 46)  
fu  
Co  
Set Clock Manually (l 46)  
Adjust Time Zone (l 46)  
Original  
This corrects the time set in Auto Clock Setting.  
The status is not displayed on the Set Up menu when the Auto  
Clock Setting is not set.  
The original language of each disc will be selected.  
Other ¢¢¢¢  
This is the language code setting.  
Input a code number with the numeric buttons. (l 45,  
“Language code list”)  
[j1] [0] [i1]  
Quick Start  
Automatic  
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording on DVD-RAM°  
° From the power off state, recording on DVD-RAM starts about 1  
second after first pressing the [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] and then  
sequentially pressing the [¥, REC] (Quick Start Mode).  
If the language selected for “Audio Language” is not available,  
subtitles of that language will automatically appear if available on  
the disc.  
Power consumption is also higher when the unit is turned off if this is  
set to “On”.  
[On] [Off]  
Settings for Recording  
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.  
Recording Time in EP Mode  
Restore Default Settings  
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode  
(l 25, “Recording modes and approximate recording times”).  
[EP-Extended Play (6H)] [EP-Extended Play (8H)]  
This returns SETUP menus to default settings, except for the clock,  
channel settings, ratings level, and on-screen language.  
[Yes] [No]  
EP-Extended You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7 GB  
Play (6H)  
EP-Extended You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7 GB  
Play (8H) disc.  
disc.  
43  
VQT0N92  
                   
Convenient functions  
DVD  
Audio  
Underlined items are the factory default settings.  
Dynamic Range Compression  
[DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)  
Change the dynamic range (l 64) for easier listening in low volume.  
Video  
Still Mode  
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play.  
(l 64, “Frame and field”)  
[Automatic] [Field] [Frame]  
[On] [Off]  
Select MTS  
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type (SAP)  
when recording or transferring (dubbing) to DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-  
Video format) or +R. (You cannot select the audio type on the unit  
when recording audio to DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or  
+R from an external device. Select it on the external device.)  
[Main] [Secondary Audio Program (SAP)]  
Field  
Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is selected.  
Frame  
Select if you cannot see small text or fine patterns  
clearly when “Automatic” is selected.  
Black Level Control  
Select “Normal”, “Lighter” or “Darker” to adjust the black level control  
to the desired setting for picture enhancement.  
Press [ENTER] to show the following settings.  
Digital Audio Output  
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through  
the unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (l 15).  
Press [ENTER] to display the menu.  
Input Level  
Adjusts the black level of the input signal.  
[Lighter] [Darker]  
PCM Down Conversion  
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz or  
88.2 kHz.  
Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz despite the above  
settings if the signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz  
or 88.2 kHz, or the disc has copy protection.  
Output Level (Composite/SVideo)  
Adjusts the black level of the output signal from the VIDEO OUT  
and S-VIDEO OUT terminal.  
[Lighter] [Darker]  
[On] [Off]  
Output Level (Component)  
Adjusts the black level of the output signal from the COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT (Y/PB/PR) terminals.  
[Lighter] [Normal] [Darker]  
On  
Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz. (Choose  
when the connected equipment cannot process  
signals with sampling frequency of 96 kHz or  
88.2 kHz.)  
Off  
Signals are output as 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz. (Choose  
when the connected equipment can process signals  
with sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)  
Dolby Digital  
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream” which processes Dolby  
Digital signals on other connected equipment or to convert the  
signals to “PCM (2ch)” on the unit before output.  
[Bitstream] [PCM]  
Bitstream When you have connected the unit to a piece of  
equipment having Dolby Digital logo.  
PCM  
When you have connected the unit to a piece of  
equipment that doesn’t have Dolby Digital logo°.  
DTS  
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream” which processes DTS  
signals on other connected equipment or to convert the signals to  
“PCM (2ch)” on the unit before output.  
[Bitstream] [PCM]  
Bitstream When you have connected the unit to a piece of  
equipment having DTS logo.  
PCM  
When you have connected the unit to a piece of  
equipment that doesn’t have DTS logo°.  
° Incorrect settings can cause noise to be output which can be  
harmful to your ears and speakers, and audio will not be recorded  
properly on media such as mini discs.  
44  
VQT0N92  
           
Convenient functions  
DVD  
TV Screen  
Underlined items are the factory default settings.  
TV Type (l 19)  
Display  
Status Messages  
Choose whether to show status messages automatically or not.  
Choose the setting to suit your TV and preference.  
[Aspect 4:3 & 480i] [Aspect 4:3 & 480p]  
[Aspect 16:9 & 480i] [Aspect 16:9 & 480p]  
[Automatic] [Off]  
4:3 TV Settings for DVD-Video  
On-screen Language  
Choose the language for these menus and the on-screen messages.  
[English] [Español] [Français]  
/
You can select how to display the image on the TV when you watch  
16:9 images (DVD-Video) on a 4:3 standard aspect TV. (l 64)  
[Pan and Scan (Stretch to fit)] [Letterbox (Shrink to fit)]  
Pan and Scan  
(Stretch to fit)  
Video recorded for a widescreen is played with  
the sides cut off if Pan & Scan was specified.  
If 16:9 software prohibits Pan & Scan, the  
image will appear in the letterbox style (with  
black bands above and below the picture)  
despite the setting here.  
Blue Background  
Select whether to show the blue background, normally shown when  
TV reception is poor.  
[On] [Off]  
Front Display  
/
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.  
[Bright] [Dim] [Automatic]  
Letterbox  
(Shrink to fit)  
Video recorded for a widescreen is played in  
the letterbox style.  
Automatic The display turns dark during play, and reappears  
momentarily if a button is pressed. When the unit is  
turned off, the unit’s display disappears. While using  
this mode the standby power consumption can be  
reduced.  
4:3 TV Settings for DVD-RAM  
You can select how to display the image on the TV when you watch  
16:9 images (DVD-RAM) on a 4:3 standard aspect TV. (l 64)  
[4:3] [Pan and Scan (Stretch to fit)] [Letterbox (Shrink to fit)]  
4:3  
Titles are played as recorded.  
nt  
s
n
e
i
Pan and Scan  
(Stretch to fit)  
Video recorded for a widescreen is played with  
the sides cut off.  
n
tio  
nc  
nve  
fu  
Letterbox  
(Shrink to fit)  
Video recorded for a widescreen is played in  
the letterbox style.  
Co  
Language code list  
Abkhazian:  
Afar:  
Afrikaans:  
Albanian:  
Ameharic:  
Arabic:  
Armenian:  
Assamese:  
Aymara:  
Azerbaijani:  
Bashkir:  
6566 Chinese:  
6565 Corsican:  
6570 Croatian:  
8381 Czech:  
6577 Danish:  
6582 Dutch:  
7289 English:  
6583 Esperanto:  
6588 Estonian:  
6590 Faroese:  
6665 Fiji:  
9072 Hausa:  
6779 Hebrew:  
7282 Hindi:  
6783 Hungarian:  
6865 Icelandic:  
7876 Indonesian:  
6978 Interlingua:  
6979 Irish:  
7265 Lithuanian:  
7684 Romanian:  
7775 Russian:  
7771 Samoan:  
7783 Sanskrit:  
7776 Scots Gaelic:  
7784 Serbian:  
7773 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Turkmen:  
7782 Shona:  
7779 Sindhi:  
7778 Singhalese:  
7865 Slovak:  
7869 Slovenian:  
7879 Somali:  
7982 Spanish:  
8279 Telugu:  
8285 Thai:  
8377 Tibetan:  
8365 Tigrinya:  
7168 Tonga:  
8382 Turkish:  
8469  
8472  
6679  
8473  
8479  
8482  
8475  
8487  
8575  
8582  
8590  
8673  
8679  
6789  
8779  
8872  
7473  
8979  
9085  
7387 Macedonian:  
7273 Malagasy:  
7285 Malay:  
7383 Malayalam:  
7378 Maltese:  
7365 Maori:  
7165 Marathi:  
7384 Moldavian:  
7465 Mongolian:  
7487 Nauru:  
7578 Nepali:  
7583 Norwegian:  
7575 Oriya:  
7589 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Sundanese:  
7579 Persian:  
7585 Polish:  
8378 Twi:  
6984 Italian:  
8368 Ukrainian:  
8373 Urdu:  
8375 Uzbek:  
8376 Vietnamese:  
8379 Volapük:  
6983 Welsh:  
8385 Wolof:  
8387 Xhosa:  
8386 Yiddish:  
8476 Yoruba:  
8471 Zulu:  
8465  
7079 Japanese:  
7074 Javanese:  
7073 Kannada:  
7082 Kashmiri:  
7089 Kazakh:  
7176 Kirghiz:  
7565 Korean:  
6869 Kurdish:  
6976 Laotian:  
7576 Latin:  
Basque:  
6985 Finnish:  
Bengali, Bangla: 6678 French:  
Bhutani:  
Bihari:  
Breton:  
Bulgarian:  
Burmese:  
Byelorussian:  
Cambodian:  
Catalan:  
6890 Frisian:  
6672 Galician:  
6682 Georgian:  
6671 German:  
7789 Greek:  
6669 Greenlandic:  
7577 Guarani:  
6765 Gujarati:  
7065 Swahili:  
8076 Swedish:  
8084 Tagalog:  
8065 Tajik:  
7679 Portuguese:  
7665 Punjabi:  
7178 Latvian, Lettish: 7686 Quechua:  
7185 Lingala:  
8185 Tamil:  
7678 Rhaeto-Romance: 8277 Tatar:  
8484  
45  
VQT0N92  
             
Convenient functions  
DVD  
Clock Settings  
Clock settings” made here are applied to VHS as well.  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
Preparation  
POWER  
Press [DVD].  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
FUNCTIONS  
[1] While stopped  
DVD  
DVD-RAM  
Cartridge Protection Off  
Disc Protection Off  
Press [FUNCTIONS].  
[2] Select “Other  
Playback  
Schedule  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
PLAYLISTS  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
VHS  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
DVD  
FLEXIBLE RECORDING  
SETUP  
SCHEDULE  
VCR Plus+  
2
1
3
DISC MANAGEMENT  
Functions” with [3, 4]  
and press [ENTER].  
[3] Select “SETUP” with  
[3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
[4] Select “Setup” with [3,  
4] and press [2, 1].  
[5] Select “Clock Settings”  
with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
Dubbing  
ENTER  
DUBBING  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
Other Functions  
Return  
3, 4, 2, 1  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SUB MENU  
S
RETURN  
STATUS  
SETUP  
Off Timer  
6 Hours  
TIME SLIP  
JET REW  
SCHEDULE  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
Clock Settings  
Channel  
Setup  
Quick Start  
On  
REC  
REC MODE DVD ERASE ADD/DLT  
Restore Default Settings  
Disc  
Video  
Audio  
Display  
TV Screen  
1 Set Clock Automatically  
1 Adjust Time Zone  
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Clock Settings”.  
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Clock Settings”.  
Adjust the time zone (j1 or i1) if it was not set correctly with auto  
clock setting.  
You cannot change this setting if you set the clock manually.  
[6] Select “Set Clock Automatically” with [3, 4]  
and press [ENTER].  
[7] Press [ENTER].  
[6] Select “Adjust Time  
Adjust Time Zone  
Auto setting starts. This can take some time, up to a few hours  
Zone” with [3, 4] and  
press [ENTER].  
j1  
in some cases. The following screen appears when setting is  
complete.  
0
i1  
Set Clock Automatically  
[7] Select “j1” or “i1”  
Auto Clock Setting is complete.  
with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].  
7/15/2005  
DST...................  
Time Zone.......  
11:15 AM  
On  
CST  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
If the time was not set correctly, use manual clock setting or  
time zone adjust.  
1 Set Clock Manually  
DST, (Daylight Saving Time) shows the summertime setting.  
Time Zone shows the time difference from Greenwich Mean  
Time (GMT).  
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Clock Settings”.  
[6] Select “Set Clock Manually” with [3, 4] and  
press [ENTER].  
EST (Eastern Standard Time) l GMT j5  
CST (Central Standard Time) l GMT j6  
MST (Mountain Standard Time) l GMT j7  
Set Clock Manually  
Month  
1
Day  
1
Year  
Hour  
12  
Minute  
/
2000  
:
/
SAT  
00 PM  
PST (Pacific Standard Time)  
l GMT j8  
DST  
Time Zone  
EST  
AST (Alaska Standard Time) l GMT j9  
HST (Hawaii Standard Time) l GMT j10  
For other areas: xx hr  
OFF  
ENTER  
[8] Press [ENTER].  
[7] Use [2, 1] to select the item you want to  
change, and press [3, 4] to change the setting.  
To cancel in the middle  
Press [RETURN].  
DST (Daylight Saving Time): On or Off  
If you select “ON”, the clock is advanced one hour starting at  
2 a.m. on the first Sunday in April and ending at 2 a.m. on the  
last Sunday in October.  
Time Zone (labove)  
[8] Press [ENTER].  
The clock starts.  
When you change the time zone, the recording times for titles  
recorded before the time zone adjustment also change to  
correspond to the new time zone.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
46  
VQT0N92  
             
Convenient functions  
DVD  
Display examples  
(1) Current medium  
FUNCTIONS window  
By using the FUNCTIONS window you can access the main  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
DVD-RAM  
Rec.  
Play  
(2) Current recording or play status, input  
channel  
functions quickly and easily.  
Preparation  
Press [DVD].  
Shows the current state of the unit and  
the input channel.  
Stereo  
[1] While stopped  
Rec.:  
Pause:  
Play:  
Play t1.3:  
;:  
Recording  
Recording paused  
Playing  
Press [FUNCTIONS].  
FUNCT  
IONS  
DVD  
DVD-RAM  
Cartridge Protection Off  
Disc Protection Off  
Quick Viewing (Play k1.3)  
Playing paused  
Fast forwarding (5 speeds)  
Rewinding (5 speeds)  
Slow-motion (5 speeds)  
Reverse slow-motion (5 speeds)  
Playback  
Schedule  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
SCHEDULE  
VCR Plus+  
5:  
6:  
F:  
G:  
2
1
3
Dubbing  
DUBBING  
ENTER  
Other Functions  
Tray Open/Tray Close:  
Indicates the status of the disc tray  
Functions displayed depend on the type of disc.  
[2] Select an item with [3, 4] and press [ENTER].  
If you select “Other Functions”, press [3, 4] to select an item  
and press [ENTER].  
(3) Audio type (l 23, 25)  
(4)  
π
Remain  
6/8 10:15 PM  
T1 0:05.14 XP  
2:34 XP  
(5)  
(6)  
π
π
T2 0:00.10 SP  
To exit the FUNCTIONS window  
Press [FUNCTIONS].  
(7)  
(4) Available recording time and recording mode  
(e.g.: “2:34 XP” indicates 2 hours and 34 minutes in XP mode)  
(5) The current date and time  
Status displays  
Preparation  
nt  
s
n
(6) Elapsed play time  
e
i
n
Press [DVD].  
(7) Recording time  
tio  
nc  
Shows recording time, recording mode and a rough guide to  
how much space has been used for recording on the disc.  
nve  
fu  
Changing the information displayed  
Co  
Status messages appear on the TV when operating the unit, to show  
you what operation was performed and what condition the unit is in.  
Press [STATUS] to change the information  
displayed.  
The display changes each time you press the button.  
For example, DVD-RAM  
DVD-RAM  
Rec.  
Play  
Stereo  
π
Remain  
6/8 10:15 PM  
T1 0:05.14 XP  
2:34 XP  
DVD-RAM  
Rec.  
π
π
T2 0:00.10 SP  
Play  
Stereo  
No display  
47  
VQT0N92  
           
VHS  
Playback  
VHS  
Inserting a video cassette  
The surface on which you can see a roll of tape should face up,  
Insert a video cassette.  
The unit is automatically turned on.  
To eject a video cassette  
You can eject a video cassette even when the unit is in standby mode. It switches back to  
standby once it ejects the video cassette.  
For main unit  
Press [<, EJECT] on the main unit.  
For remote control  
Press [VHS] and then press and hold [, STOP] for about 3 or more seconds.  
Video cassette information  
Video cassettes  
Break off the video cassette’s tab to prevent accidental erasure. Cover the hole with a double layer of  
adhesive tape when you want to use the video cassette for recording again.  
You can use video cassettes with the VHS and S-VHS marks, but the unit is unable to make full use of  
the characteristics of S-VHS video cassettes.  
Tab  
Video cassette care  
Poor quality or damaged video cassettes can cause the heads to become dirty and malfunction. Store your video cassettes carefully and  
discard them when they become dirty or damaged.  
Never use video cassettes on which juice has been spilled or those that are extremely damaged since this will not only cause the heads to  
become dirty, but will also make the unit malfunction.  
Maintenance  
Cleaning the video heads  
Dirt on the video heads can cause poor recording and play.  
If the picture does not improve, use an optional head-cleaning cassette (part number NV-TCL30PT). If the problem persists, seek advice from  
a qualified service person.  
48  
VQT0N92  
                       
Playback  
VHS  
Playing a video cassette  
To pause play  
Press [;, PAUSE]. (Press again to restart play.)  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
POWER  
Í
To stop play  
Press [, STOP].  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
Note  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
VHS  
DVD  
VHS  
When the unit is standby, an inserted video cassette can be played  
back by pressing [1, PLAY].  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
CANCEL/RESET  
V
SLOW/  
When the tape reaches its end, the unit automatically rewinds it to  
the beginning. This function does not work during scheduled  
recording, fast-forwarding and specified stop recording.  
Jet Search, cue, review or slow playback will be automatically  
canceled after 10 minutes, and pause after 5 minutes.  
When viewing a still picture or during slow playback, the picture  
that appears in VP mode may be distorted.  
When playing back a tape which was recorded on another VCR, it  
may be necessary to adjust the tracking (l 50). In some cases the  
picture quality may still be inferior. This is due to format constraints.  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
6, 5  
PLAY  
1
;
NU  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
FUNCTIONS  
S
TIME SLIP  
VHS MENU  
SCHEDULE  
JET REW  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
TOP MENU  
6 JET REW  
REC  
REC MODE
 
DVD ERASE
 
ADD/D
L
T  
Preparation  
Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. the AV input) on the TV.  
Press [VHS].  
[1] Press [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] to turn the unit on.  
[2] Insert a recorded video cassette. (l 48)  
[3] Press [1, PLAY].  
Play starts automatically if you insert a video cassette with the  
tab removed.  
Fast-forward/Rewind  
Slow  
While stopped  
During play  
k
c
Press [6] (backward)/[5] (forward).  
Press and hold [;, PAUSE] for about 2 seconds or  
more.  
ba  
y
a
Cue/Review  
Press [1, PLAY] to restart normal playback.  
Pl  
During play  
Jet Rewind  
To perform a Higher Speed Rewind  
Press [6JET REW].  
The “J. REW” indication appears on the TV screen (except when the  
remaining tape time indication appears).  
Tap or keep pressing [6] (backward)/[5]  
(forward).  
If you keep pressing these buttons, normal playback restarts by  
releasing them.  
Tap [1, PLAY] to restart normal playback.  
Depending on the tape or an operating condition, the rewind speed  
may change somewhat.  
The tape counter is reset to “0:00.00” when the tape is rewound to  
the beginning.  
Jet Search  
During play  
Tap [6] (backward)/[5] (forward) twice. You  
Depending on the tape, this function may not work.  
can increase Cue/Review search speed.  
Press [1, PLAY] to restart normal playback.  
You can select search speed to view the recorded picture. (l 54)  
The picture recorded in EP or VP mode may be distorted if it is  
played at approx. 35 times speed. A vertical scroll may occur. It is  
not a malfunction but if it happens, change to approx. 27 times  
speed.  
The picture may not be in color or may be distorted depending on  
the TV.  
49  
VQT0N92  
                 
Playback  
VHS  
Playing a tape with high image quality  
With the TP channel, you can play a tape with high image quality on  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
CH, W, X  
POWER  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
a TV compatible with progressive output.  
INPUT SELECT  
TV/VIDEO  
VHS  
Preparation  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
VHS  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
DVD  
Connect to the COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals (l 15)  
Select the TV type (l 19, 45)  
TRACKING/  
V-LOCK, r, s  
CH, W, X  
Numeric  
buttons  
[1] Press [DVD].  
AUDIO  
[2] Press [INPUT SELECT] or [CH, W, X] to select  
the “TP” channel.  
CANCEL/RESET  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
About “TP” channel (l 58)  
SLOW/  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
[3] Press [VHS] and press [1, PLAY].  
PLAY  
Playing the tape with high image quality is initiated.  
1
;
Note  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
Set the TV’s aspect ratio according to the TV size.  
The TV must be compatible with progressive output.  
Adjusting the playback picture  
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
S
Manual tracking  
SCHEDULE  
STATUS  
DISPLAY  
JET REW  
The unit usually makes tracking adjustments, but you may need to  
do it manually if noise appears on a tape recorded on other  
equipment.  
STATUS  
VCR/TV  
REC MODE  
REC  
REC MODE DVD ERASE ADD/DLT  
CREATE  
µ
DUBBING  
VHS DVD  
VCR/TV  
CHAPTER  
During play  
Press [TRACKING/V-LOCK, r] or  
[TRACKING/V-LOCK, s].  
Repeat until the noise disappears.  
Preparation  
Press [VHS].  
Vertical locking adjustment  
Adjust the vertical synchronization to stop the picture from jiggling  
while paused.  
S-VHS Quasi Playback (SQPB)  
It is also possible to play back tapes recorded in the S-VHS system.  
Some picture noise may occur depending on the type of tape used.  
It is not possible to fully obtain the high resolution that S-VHS is  
capable of.  
While paused  
Press [TRACKING/V-LOCK, r] or  
[TRACKING/V-LOCK, s].  
Repeat until the jiggling stops.  
It is not possible to record in the S-VHS system with the unit.  
Repeat Playback  
During play or while stopped  
Keep pressing [1, PLAY] for about 5 or  
more seconds.  
The “RP” indication appears on the unit’s display.  
At the end of the program, the tape rewinds to the  
beginning of the program and plays it again (it only  
works if there is at least 5 seconds blank space at the end of the  
program). This repeats until you cancel it.  
To return to auto tracking  
Press both [TRACKING/V-LOCK, r] and [TRACKING/V-LOCK, s]  
simultaneously.  
To remove the noise from a paused picture  
Start slow play, then adjust the tracking.  
Note  
This function may not work with some TV models and tapes.  
You can also adjust the tracking and vertical synchronization with  
[CH, W, X] on the VHS side of the main unit.  
To restart normal playback  
Press [1, PLAY].  
To stop play  
Press [, STOP].  
50  
VQT0N92  
                   
Recording  
VHS  
Recording TV programs  
The remaining tape time may not be displayed correctly depending  
on the tape used.  
Recording procedures  
Preparation  
Specifying the time when recording will  
Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.  
stop  
Preparation  
Check that the clock is set to the correct time. If it has not been set,  
set it (l 46).  
Press [VHS].  
Press [VHS].  
[1] Insert a video cassette with an intact accidental  
While recording  
Press [¥, REC] to select recording time.  
On the main unit, press [¥, REC] on the VHS side.  
erasure prevention tab. (l 48)  
[2] Press [CH, W, X] to select a TV channel.  
If you keep pressing these buttons, the channels change  
quickly.  
The unit’s display  
Each time you press the button:  
Counter (Cancel) # OFF 0:30 # OFF 1:00 # OFF 1:30  
^------ OFF 4:00 ! OFF 3:00 ! OFF 2:00 !----------}  
To select channels with the numeric buttons:  
Antenna Mode (Airwaves)  
e.g.,  
“5”:  
“15”:  
[0] )[5]  
[1] )[5]  
For your reference  
This does not work during scheduled recording.  
Recording stops and the set time is cleared if you press [, STOP].  
CableTV Mode (Cable)  
e.g.,  
“5”:  
“15”:  
“115”:  
[0] )[0] )[5]  
[0] )[1] )[5]  
[1] )[1] )[5]  
Watching the TV while recording  
Preparation  
Connection (without Audio/Video cable)  
- Make sure that the TV indicator is lit on the unit’s display. If it is  
not lit, press [VCR/TV] to light it.  
[3] Press [REC MODE] to select a recording mode.  
Each time you press the button:  
SP>EP>VP  
^-----------------}  
Connection (with Audio/Video cable)  
- Press [TV/VIDEO] to change the input mode to “TV”.  
[4] Press [¥, REC] to start recording.  
To pause recording  
Press [;, PAUSE]. (Press again to restart recording.)  
Press TV’s [CH, W, X] to select a desired TV  
channel.  
To stop recording  
Press [, STOP].  
For your reference  
You can also do this if the unit is making a scheduled recording.  
The recording is not affected.  
k
c
ba  
y
a
Recording mode  
Pl  
SP: You can record the length shown on the tape.  
EP: 3 times the length of SP mode.  
VP: 5 times the length of SP mode.  
Playing/Recording DVD while VHS  
recording  
To have a longer recording capacity, select “EP” or “VP”.  
If the image quality is important to you or if you wish to store the  
tape for a long period, select “SP”.  
g
You can play or record discs while recording. The recording will not  
be affected.  
DVD playback (l 21)  
n
i
rd  
o
c
The unit can play tapes recorded in LP mode on other equipment  
(“LP” lights on the unit’s display).  
DVD recording (l 25)  
- When a tuner channel is being recorded on VHS, you can only  
Re  
record the same channel on DVD.  
VP mode:  
“VP” flashes on the unit’s display for 8 seconds after recording  
has started.  
A tape recorded in VP mode by the unit cannot be played  
back by other VCRs. It is recommended to distinguish it from  
other tapes by writing “VP” on the tape label, etc.  
It takes more time for automatic tracking to work when playing  
tapes recorded with VP mode, and it may not work at all with  
some tapes. Do tracking manually if this is the case (l 50).  
Note  
Even if the video cassette you use is labeled “S-VHS”, it is not  
possible to record in the S-VHS system with the unit. It  
records in the normal VHS system.  
You cannot play VP recording on other equipment.  
You cannot change channels while recording. You can change  
channels while in pause mode.  
When recording is paused for 5 or more minutes, the unit returns  
to stop mode.  
To display the approximate remaining tape time  
[1] Select “TAPE SELECT” from the VHS MENU and select the  
corresponding tape length. (l 54)  
[2] Press [STATUS] several times.  
The display changes as follows each time [STATUS] is pressed.  
Clock ) Counter ) Remaining tape time  
^--------------------------------------------------------}  
51  
VQT0N92  
                   
Recording  
VHS  
Scheduled Recording  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
POWER  
You can enter up to 16 programs a month in advance.  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
Preparation  
Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.  
Check that the clock is set to the correct time. If it has not been set,  
set it (l 46).  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
VHS  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
VHS  
Insert a video cassette with an intact accidental erasure prevention  
tab. (l 48)  
Press [VHS].  
Numeric  
buttons  
AUDIO  
CANCEL/RESET  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
VCR Plusi  
Using VCR Plus_ system  
SLOW/  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
®
Entering the PlusCode numbers is an easy way of scheduled  
recording. You can find these codes in TV listings in newspapers and  
magazines.  
When connecting a cable TV box or satellite receiver, the VCR  
Plusi system does not work. Program the scheduled recording  
manually (l 53).  
PLAY  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
3, 4, 2, 1  
[1] Press [VCR Plus_].  
ENTER  
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
VCR Plus+  
R 2 : 00  
10/13 WE  
SP  
10:12 AM  
S
RETURN  
SCHEDULE  
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
JET REW  
SCHEDULE  
REC MODE  
REC  
REC MODE DVD ERASE ADD/DLT  
CREATE  
[2] Press the numeric buttons to enter the  
PlusCode number.  
COPYING  
VHS  
VCR/TV  
CHAPTER  
DVD  
Press [2] to move back to correct a digit.  
[3] Press [ENTER].  
Cautions for using scheduled recording  
on DVD and VHS  
Scheduled recording automatically starts at the set  
time.  
SCHEDULED  
RECORDING  
R 2 : 00  
10/13 WE  
ON  
13WE 10:12 AM 10:30 AM S P  
SP  
10:12 AM  
CH  
25  
DATE  
OFF  
Scheduled recording can be started whether the unit is turned on or  
off. When the unit is turned off, the sound and the video cannot be  
outputted to the TV.  
Confirm the program and correct it if necessary using [3, 4,  
2, 1]. (“Manual programming” l 53, step 2)  
“INVALID ENTRY” is displayed when you enter the wrong  
PlusCode number. Reenter the PlusCode number.  
Scheduled recording for TV programs cannot be  
executed on both DVD and VHS at the same time.  
Make sure the scheduled recording start times do not overlap on  
both DVD (l 29) and VHS (l 53) Scheduled Recording screens.  
[4] If the program is correct  
Press [ENTER].  
“ ” lights on the unit’s display.  
Repeat steps 1–4 to program other recordings.  
When the scheduled recording settings overlap:  
When the start time of both scheduled recordings is the same, the  
scheduled recording of DVD has priority.  
[5] Press [RETURN].  
When the same tuner channels are specified in scheduled  
recordings on both VHS and DVD, only one scheduled recording  
can be started.  
When the interval between the first scheduled recording and the  
second scheduled recording on DVD is 1 minute or less as shown  
below, the second scheduled recording on DVD has priority over  
the scheduled recording on VHS even if its start time is later than  
the scheduled recording on VHS.  
1 minute  
DVD  
2 CH  
VHS  
4 CH  
10 CH  
When the scheduled recording settings of DVD and VHS are  
overlapped, the setting of DVD takes priority.  
“ ” lights on the unit’s display of both sides in the standby mode.  
When the recording starts, “ ” on the recording side (DVD side)  
remains lit and the “ ” on the other side (VHS side) starts flashing.  
52  
VQT0N92  
         
Recording  
VHS  
Manual programming  
Auto SP/EP mode  
When connecting a cable TV box or satellite receiver, select the  
channel on the cable TV box or satellite receiver before scheduled  
recording starts.  
If, at the beginning of a scheduled recording, there is not enough  
tape remaining to complete the recording, the SP/EP function will  
automatically run the tape at EP speed for recording. This ensures  
that the entire program will be recorded. If EP mode is not enough to  
stretch the remaining tape to fit the whole program you will not be  
able to record the whole TV program.  
[1] Press [SCHEDULE].  
Make sure “NEW SCHEDULED RECORDING” is selected.  
CH  
25  
DATE  
ON  
OFF  
NEW SCHEDULED  
RECORDING is  
selected.  
13WE 10:12 AM 10:30 AM  
NEW SCHEDULED RECORDING  
S P  
Scheduled recording  
1st program  
2nd program (60 min.)  
(30 min.)  
[2] Press [ENTER] to move and change the items  
using [3, 4, 2, 1].  
SCHEDULED  
RECORDING  
R 2 : 00  
10/13 WE  
ON OFF  
s : ss s : ss  
SP  
10:12 AM  
15 min.  
at SP  
45 min.  
at EP  
CH  
DATE  
ssss  
30 min. at SP  
ss  
s s  
Video tape (e.g.: 60-minute cassette)  
You may also use the numeric buttons to enter “CH”.  
It is not possible to automatically activate VP mode.  
The tape length must be set correctly. (l 54)  
Some tapes may not work correctly.  
If the recording mode changes from SP to EP during a scheduled  
recording, some picture distortion occurs at that point.  
CH (Program Position/TV Station Name)  
DATE  
You can also make a daily or weekly program.  
ON (start time)/OFF (finish time)  
The time increases or decreases in 30-minute increments if  
you hold down the button.  
Recording mode  
Check, change or delete programs  
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the scheduled  
recording list by pressing [SCHEDULE].  
You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording  
mode.  
SP,.EP,.VP,.A°,.SP... (l 51)  
° Auto SP/EP mode (l right)  
Preparation  
Press [VHS].  
[3] Press [ENTER] when you have finished making  
[1] Press [SCHEDULE].  
changes.  
CH  
DATE  
ON  
OFF  
6
25  
SA  
13WE  
11:00 PM 12:00 PM S P  
10:12 AM 10:30 AM S P  
“ ” lights on the unit’s display.  
“INVALID ENTRY” is displayed when you enter the wrong item.  
Reenter the item.  
NEW SCHEDULED RECORDING  
To continue programming:  
Select “NEW SCHEDULED RECORDING” and repeat steps  
2–3.  
[2] Press [3, 4] to select a program.  
[3] Press [CANCEL/RESET, ¢] to delete,  
You cannot delete programs that are currently recording.  
or press [ENTER] to change.  
[4] Press [RETURN].  
g
n
i
The scheduled recording setting screen appears.  
Note  
rd  
o
c
[4] If you press [ENTER] in step 3  
Use [3, 4, 2, 1] to change and press [ENTER].  
[5] Press [RETURN].  
“ ” and “1” flashes when the unit cannot perform scheduled  
recording (e.g., video cassette with no accidental erasure  
prevention tab or no video cassette in the cassette compartment).  
The actual time recorded may be longer than the program itself  
when TV programs are recorded using VCR Plus_ system.  
If you set (l 46) “DST” (Daylight Saving Time) to “ON” when  
manually setting the clock, scheduled recording may not work  
when summer switches to winter and vice versa.  
Re  
For your reference  
Programs that failed to record are not deleted from the list  
immediately, but are deleted from the list automatically at 4 a.m.  
2 days later.  
To stop recording while a program is working  
Press [, STOP], then [ENTER] within 5 seconds.  
You can also press and hold [] on the VHS of the main unit for 3  
or more seconds to stop recording.  
53  
VQT0N92  
             
Convenient functions  
VHS  
Changing the unit’s settings  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
POWER  
Preparation  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
Select the unit viewing channel on the TV.  
Press [VHS].  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
VHS  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
VHS  
Common procedures  
[1] While stopped  
AUDIO  
Press [VHS MENU].  
AUDIO  
CANCEL/RESET  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
VHS MENU  
¥ ON  
SLOW/  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
OSD  
TAPE SELECT  
OFF  
:, 9  
PLAY  
¥ T120  
T160  
¥ ON  
T180  
OFF  
BLUE BACK  
JET SEARCH  
t 27 ¥ t 35  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
VHS MENU  
STATUS  
:
j/i:  
SELECT  
END  
3, 4, 2, 1  
:VHS MENU  
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
[2] Use [3, 4] to select a desired item.  
[3] Use [2, 1] to change the setting.  
S
SCHEDULE  
STATUS  
DISPLAY  
JET REW  
To exit the settings screen  
REC  
REC MODE DVD ERASE ADD/DLT  
CREATE  
µ
Press [VHS MENU].  
COPYING  
VCR/TV  
CHAPTER  
VHS  
DVD  
1 Summary of settings  
VHS Index Search System (VISS)  
This description shows the initial settings for the unit. For  
details on menu operation (l above).  
Underlined items are the factory default settings.  
The unit automatically records special index signals on the tape  
every time a recording is started. The index search function makes  
use of these index signals to let you find the beginning of a desired  
program quickly and easily.  
VHS MENU  
OSD (l 55)  
[ON] [OFF]  
Index signals are recorded in the following cases.  
When a recording is started by pressing [¥, REC].  
When scheduled recording is started.  
ON  
Messages appear on the TV screen for about  
5 seconds after you perform operations.  
The on-screen display will always appear on the TV  
screen during rewind, Jet Rewind and fast forward.  
Preparation  
Select the unit viewing channel on the TV.  
Press [VHS].  
OFF  
Messages do not appear.  
Insert a recorded video cassette.  
TAPE SELECT  
Set the length of tape you are using so the unit can show the correct  
remaining time.  
While stopped or during normal play  
Press [: ] or [ 9].  
Each press increases the number of skips.  
[T120] [T160] [T180]  
[T120]:  
[T160]:  
[T180]:  
T30, T60, T90 and T120 tapes  
T140 and T160 tapes  
T180 tapes  
To cancel the index search  
Press [, STOP].  
BLUE BACK  
Note  
[ON] [OFF]  
You can search up to 20 index signals can be searched for in both  
directions.  
ON  
The screen shows a blue background when you play  
unrecorded portions.  
When you press either one of the buttons too much, you can  
control the number of skips by pressing the opposite button.  
The figure on the display decreases by 1 each time an index signal  
is located.  
This feature may not work correctly if the index signals are too  
close together. Make recordings of at least 5 minutes.  
OFF  
The blue background function does not work.  
JET SEARCH (l 49)  
Set the speed for JET SEARCH when playing EP and VP tapes.  
It is possible to view the picture recorded in EP or VP mode at  
approx. 27 or 35 times speed.  
[k27] [k35]  
Select [k27] if the picture is poor at [k35].  
54  
VQT0N92  
                   
Convenient functions  
VHS  
Various on-screen display indications  
Changing audio  
To see these displays, set the “OSD” item in the “VHS MENU” to  
When a stereo and/or SAP broadcast is received, “STEREO” or  
“ON”. (l 54)  
“SAP” lights to show the type of broadcast.  
Press [STATUS].  
While playing tapes  
Press [AUDIO].  
The audio changes as follows:  
Stereo > Mono L > Mono R > No display (Normal audio track)  
^------------------------------------------------------------}  
The time and operation details appear on the screen for about  
5 seconds.  
1
2 3  
4
5
CH 1  
STEREO  
Mono L  
0:00.22  
SP 1  
6
7
While watching TV:  
You cannot change audio.  
Auto Bilingual Choice Function  
When a stereo broadcast or SAP broadcast is recorded and played  
back on the unit, stereo sound will be automatically selected in the  
case of a stereo broadcast and SAP sound will be automatically  
selected in the case of a dual-sound broadcast (Mono and SAP or  
Stereo and SAP).  
1
2
Channel display  
Stereo/Mono/SAP indication  
Indicates whether a program is broadcast in stereo, mono  
or SAP.  
This function may not work properly if the program is played back  
from a mid point. In a case like this, press [AUDIO] and select the  
right sound.  
The function will not work with a cassette which has been recorded  
using external equipment.  
3
Audio indicators (appear only in playback)  
The Left (Mono L) and Right (Mono R) indicators show  
which sound mode is selected as follows:  
Stereo:  
Mono L:  
Mono R:  
Normal:  
Stereo indicators appear.  
The Mono L indicator appears.  
The Mono R indicator appears.  
Neither the L nor R indicator appears.  
4
5
Operation status display  
Shows the time and tape counter  
Pressing [STATUS] once makes the on-screen display  
appear. After that, press the button repeatedly to change  
the display as follows:  
Present time > Tape counter > Remaining tape time  
^-----------------------------------------------------------------}  
During Index search: “S 01” to “S 20” is displayed.  
During Jet Rewind:  
“J. REW” is displayed.  
Press [CANCEL/RESET, ¢] to reset the tape counter  
(elapsed time) to “0:00.00”. The tape counter is  
automatically reset to “0:00.00” when inserting a video  
cassette.  
The remaining time is approximate. It will be incorrect if  
you set the wrong tape time in “TAPE SELECT” in the  
“VHS MENU” and if the tape is of poor quality.  
nt  
s
n
e
i
6
7
Cassette-in indicator  
Shows whether you have inserted a video cassette.  
n
tio  
nc  
nve  
fu  
Co  
Recording mode indicator (l 51)  
Note  
These displays do not appear when paused or during slow play.  
The on-screen display may be distorted depending on the playback  
tape or the input signal.  
55  
VQT0N92  
               
DVD/VHS  
Transferring (Dubbing)  
DVD VHS  
Before transferring (dubbing)  
You can select from a variety of methods to transfer (dub) on the unit.  
You cannot transfer (dub) titles which have been treated to prevent copying.  
Direction  
Type of transfer (dubbing) you want  
Suitable methods  
From  
To  
Easy transferring (dubbing) with one button  
When you want to transfer (dub) from the selected start  
point to the end of the tape  
One Touch Transfer  
(l 57)  
GUI Transfer (l 57)  
Transferring (dubbing) with detailed settings  
When you want to transfer (dub) from the selected start  
point to the end of the tape  
DVD-RAM, DVD-R,  
DVD-RW, or +R  
VHS  
When you want to transfer (dub) to fit in the remaining  
capacity of the disc  
Manual Transfer (l 58)  
When you want to transfer (dub) while checking the video  
and the audio to select the desired part  
Easy transferring (dubbing) with one button  
When you want to transfer (dub) a whole disc  
When you want to transfer (dub) from the beginning of the  
selected title to the end of the disc  
One Touch Transfer  
(l 59)  
DVD-RAM or DVD-RW  
(DVD Video Recording  
format)  
VHS  
GUI Transfer (l 60)  
Transferring (dubbing) with detailed settings  
When you want to transfer (dub) multiple titles or playlists  
in combination  
When you want to transfer (dub) while checking the video  
and the audio to select the desired part  
Manual Transfer (l 62)  
Easy transferring (dubbing) with one button  
When you want to transfer (dub) a whole disc  
When you want to transfer (dub) from the beginning of the  
selected title to the end of the disc  
One Touch Transfer  
(l 59)  
DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-  
Video format) or +R  
VHS  
VHS  
Transferring (dubbing) with detailed settings  
When you want to transfer (dub) while checking the video  
and the audio to select the desired part  
Manual Transfer (l 62)  
Cannot transfer  
Easy transferring (dubbing) with one button  
Finalized DVD-R, DVD-  
RW (DVD-Video format),  
+R, +RW or DVD-Video  
on sale that are not copy-  
protected, etc.  
DVD-Video Transfer  
Transferring (dubbing) with detailed settings  
When you want to transfer (dub) whole of a disc  
When you want to transfer only for the specified time  
When you want to transfer (dub) while checking the video  
and the audio to select the desired part  
(l 61)  
Manual Transfer (l 62)  
Caution for transfer (dubbing) from VHS to DVD  
Copy-protected video tapes cannot be dubbed. Most video tapes  
are copy-protected to prevent illegal reproduction and they  
cannot be recorded.  
Caution for transfer (dubbing) from DVD to VHS  
Copy-protected discs cannot be dubbed. Most discs are copy-  
protected to prevent illegal reproduction and they cannot be  
recorded.  
When a copy-protected tape is inserted, a message appears on  
the display and the recording stops on the spot.  
If a part of a tape recorded in VP mode is dubbed to disc, noise  
may appear at the beginning of the dubbed part.  
Only the following operations are allowed while transferring  
(dubbing):  
Stopping transfer (One Touch or GUI Transfer) by pressing and  
holding [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.  
Stopping transfer (One Touch or Manual Transfer) by pressing  
[, STOP].  
Only the following operations are allowed while transferring  
(dubbing):  
Stopping transfer (One Touch or GUI Transfer) by pressing and  
holding [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.  
Stopping transfer (One Touch or Manual Transfer) by pressing  
[, STOP].  
Turning the unit on/off (One Touch Transfer)  
When transfer (dubbing) is started, the following operations  
also start automatically  
“Status Messages” on Display ) “Off” (l 45) (One Touch, GUI  
or Manual Transfer)  
Turning the unit on/off (One Touch Transfer)  
When transfer (dubbing) is started, the following operations  
also start automatically  
Recording channel indicator on VHS ) “DC” (One Touch or GUI  
Transfer)  
“OSD” on VHS MENU ) “OFF” (l 54) (One Touch, GUI or  
Manual Transfer)  
Audio output when playing back DVD ) Stereo (L R) [RAM]  
(One Touch, GUI or Manual Transfer)  
Recording channel indicator on DVD ) “TP” (One Touch or GUI  
Transfer)  
When the “PB” indication flashes on the DVD side of the unit's  
display, the playback location of the disc is recorded by the  
Resume Function (l 21). If you start transferring (dubbing) at this  
time, the transfer (dubbing) is executed from the top of the title  
which contains the starting position of playback to the end of the  
disc.  
56  
VQT0N92  
     
Transferring (Dubbing)  
DVD VHS  
Transfer (Dubbing) from VHS  
Note  
While One Touch Transfer (Dubbing) is activated, a scheduled  
recording cannot be started.  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
POWER  
When the transfer (dubbing) is not started or not executed, the  
“DUBBING” indicator blinks for about 7 seconds. Check if the unit is  
properly prepared.  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
VHS  
DVD  
PLAY  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
DVD  
Dividing a title to be dubbed  
In One Touch Transfer (Dubbing) from VHS to DVD, the title is  
divided by index signal detected and then recorded. You can  
search desired titles with Direct Navigator’s Title View (l 33) after  
transfer (dub) to DVD.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
3, 4, 2, 1  
Titles recorded within 15 minutes (25 minutes in VP mode) of  
each other may not be divided properly.  
ENTER  
RETURN  
SUB MENU  
The recording time may become longer than the original title  
depending on the number of index signals.  
RETURN  
S
TIME SLIP  
CREATE  
SCHEDULE  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
JET REW  
F.REC  
DUBBING  
CHAPTER  
If you want to transfer (dub) without dividing the contents into  
titles, follow the methods below.  
VHS  
DVD  
DVD  
Set “Time Limit” to “On” on the GUI transfer (l below).  
Manual transfer (l 58).  
GUI (Graphical User Interface) Transfer  
VHS  
CH  
DVD  
REC  
(Dubbing)  
DUBBING  
VHS  
DVD  
/k1.3  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
You can transfer (dub) programs recorded on a tape onto a disc°° from  
the location of playback as of the transfer (dubbing) start of the tape.  
°
DUBBING indicator  
° When you set the recording mode to “FR” and “Time Limit” to “Off”,  
you can transfer (dub) the whole tape from the beginning to the  
end. (l 58)  
°° Available discs for transfer (dubbing) from tape are DVD-RAM,  
non-finalized DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R.  
One Touch Transfer (Dubbing) (VHS  
l
DVD)  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
You can transfer (dub) programs recorded on a tape onto a disc° with  
one stroke of the button.  
Preparation  
Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.  
In One Touch Transfer (Dubbing), programs are automatically  
transferred (dubbed) onto the disc from the location of playback at  
the time when the transfer (dubbing) of the tape starts.  
° Available discs for transfer (dubbing) from tape are DVD-RAM,  
non-finalized DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R.  
DVD  
Release protection (disc l 30, cartridge l 30). [RAM]  
Insert a disc and confirm there is sufficient empty space for  
recording on it. (l 8, 47)  
When SAP broadcast program is played back on VHS, select the  
audio to be recorded on discs in “Select MTS” in the “SETUP”  
menu. (l 44) [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
Preparation  
Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.  
DVD  
VHS  
Release protection (disc l 30, cartridge l 30). [RAM]  
Insert a disc and confirm there is sufficient empty space for  
recording on it. (l 8, 47)  
Insert the video cassette containing the program to be copied (l 48).  
[1] Press [DVD].  
[2] While both DVD and VHS are stopped  
Select the recording mode. (l 25)  
When SAP broadcast program is played back on VHS, select the  
audio to be recorded on disc in “Select MTS” in the “SETUP” menu.  
(l 44) [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
Press [FUNCTIONS].  
[3] Select “DUBBING” with [  
3,  
4] and press [ENTER].  
[4] Set the transfer  
DUBBING  
VHS  
Cancel All  
Dubbing Direction  
(dubbing) direction.  
“Set “Source” to “VHS”.  
If you are not going to change  
the dub direction, press [4],  
then skip to step 5.  
Source  
Insert the video cassette containing the program to be copied (l 48).  
g
)
DVD  
VHS  
n
i
Destination  
r
Mode  
ng  
[1] While both DVD and VHS are stopped  
VHS-Video  
SP  
er  
bi  
sf  
Press and hold [DVD, DUBBING] for about 3  
seconds or more (until “START” on the unit’s  
display terminates flashing).  
On the main unit, press [DVD].  
Check if transfer (dubbing) starts properly.  
The “DUBBING” indicator on the main unit  
lights.  
ub  
n
D
(
To change the setting  
(1)Make sure “Dubbing Direction” is selected and press [1].  
(2)Make sure “Source” is selected and press [ENTER].  
(3)Press [3, 4] to select “VHS” and press [ENTER].  
When you set “Source” to “VHS”, “DVD” is automatically  
selected on “Destination”.  
Dub is automatically completed when the tape  
reaches its end or the disc becomes full.  
(4)Press [2].  
(5)Press [4].  
[5] Set the recording mode.  
DUBBING  
If you are not going to change  
the recording mode, press [4],  
then skip to step 6.  
Cancel All  
VHS-Video  
SP  
Format  
Dubbing Direction  
VHS  
DVD  
Recording Mode  
Mode  
VHS-Video  
SP  
Off  
Time Limit  
To change the setting  
To stop transfer (dubbing) in the middle  
Press [, STOP] or press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds  
or more.  
(1)Make sure “Mode” is selected and press [1].  
(2)Make sure “Recording Mode” is selected and press [ENTER].  
57  
VQT0N92  
         
Transferring (Dubbing)  
DVD VHS  
(3)Select recording mode (XP, SP, LP, EP or FR) with [3, 4]  
Manual Transfer (Dubbing)  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
and press [ENTER].  
About FR mode (l below)  
(4)Press [2].  
You can transfer (dub) programs recorded on a tape onto a disc° by  
specifying the recording parts while watching them.  
° Available discs for transfer (dubbing) from tape are DVD-RAM,  
non-finalized DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R.  
(5)Press [4].  
[6] Set the time limit.  
If you are not going to change  
the recording time, press [4],  
then skip to step 7.  
DUBBING  
Cancel All  
Dubbing Direction  
Off  
Time Limit  
VHS  
DVD  
Preparation  
Mode  
VHS-Video  
SP  
Off  
Current Capacity: 2:00  
Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.  
Time Limit  
To change the setting  
(1)Make sure “Time Limit” is  
selected and press [1].  
(2)Make sure “Time Limit” is selected and press [ENTER].  
(3)Select time limit (“On” or “Off”) with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
“When you select “Off”, proceed to Step (6) below.  
(4)Press [3, 4] to select “Set time” and press [ENTER].  
(5)Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [3, 4] to  
set the recording time, and then press [ENTER].  
You can also set the set time with the numeric buttons.  
Maximum recording time is 8 hours.  
DVD  
Release protection (disc l 30, cartridge l 30). [RAM]  
Insert a disc and confirm there is sufficient empty space for  
recording on it. (l 8, 47)  
VHS  
Insert the video cassette containing the program to be copied.  
(l 48)  
Check the channel. If “DC” channel is selected, transfer (dubbing)  
does not work properly.  
- When the “DC” channel is selected on VHS, you cannot select the  
“TP” channel on DVD.  
(6)Press [2].  
(7)Press [4].  
[1] Press [VHS] and press [1, PLAY].  
Start playing the video cassette and find the start point of the  
recording.  
[7] Make sure “Start  
DUBBING  
Cancel All  
Dubbing” is selected  
Select the audio to be played (the audio to be recorded)  
beforehand.  
The audio from the TV is recorded. To record your favorite  
audio, select the audio by pressing [AUDIO]. (l 55)  
Dubbing Direction  
VHS  
DVD  
and press [ENTER].  
The confirmation screen  
appears.  
Mode  
VHS-Video  
SP  
Press ENTER to start dubbing.  
1:15  
Time Limit  
Start Dubbing  
[8] Select “Yes” with [2]  
and press [ENTER].  
[2] Press [;, PAUSE] at the start point of the  
recording.  
[3] Press [DVD].  
ENTER  
Transfer (dubbing) is started.  
Transfer (dubbing) is automatically stopped when the tape  
reaches the end or the remaining capacity of the disc is filled.  
(A message appears on the TV screen and then disappears a  
few seconds later.)  
[4] Select “TP” channel with [INPUT SELECT] or  
[CH, W, X].  
The VHS picture is displayed on the TV.  
To stop transfer (dubbing) in the middle  
Press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.  
[5] Press [REC MODE] to select the recording  
mode. (l 25)  
[6] Press [¥, REC].  
About FR Mode  
Disc recording and VHS play start at the same time.  
When “Time Limit” is set to “Off” in Step 6 above:  
The recording mode is automatically selected by estimating the  
remaining capacity of the disc for transfer (dubbing) of only the  
recorded parts in the video cassette (unrecorded parts will not  
be recorded).  
To pause or stop Manual Transfer (Dubbing)  
You cannot stop or pause DVD and VHS at the same time.  
To pause or stop recording  
When you press [ENTER] to start transfer (dub), the tape is  
automatically fast-forwarded to the end and then fast-rewound to  
the beginning before the transfer (dubbing) is actually started. It  
may take time to start transfer (dub). If the remaining capacity of  
the disc is insufficient, the transfer (dubbing) will be stopped in  
the middle.  
Press [DVD] and [;, PAUSE] or [, STOP].  
To pause or stop play  
Press [VHS] and press [;, PAUSE] or [, STOP].  
Note  
When the transfer (dubbing) is already started, you can switch the  
DVD/VHS output manually.  
The recording is divided into titles every time the tape index  
signals are detected.  
When “Time Limit” is set to “On” in Step 6 above:  
The recording mode is automatically determined by estimating  
the remaining capacity of the disc for transfer (dubbing) of the  
contents equivalent to the recording time set from the start point  
of the transfer (dubbing) on the video cassette (unrecorded parts  
will also be recorded).  
About TP channel  
(TP: Dubbing input channel)  
When the TP channel is selected, it becomes possible for DVD to  
receive audio and video signals from VHS. This enables dubbing  
from VHS to DVD.  
The TP channel can be selected by pressing [DVD] and pressing  
[INPUT SELECT] or [CH, W, X] several times.  
When you play back a tape after turning the channel to “TP”, the  
picture on VHS is displayed on the TV screen. Utilizing this  
feature, you can enjoy the picture on the tape in progressive  
output. (l 50)  
The recording is not divided into titles.  
Compared to the TP channel, the DC channel enables VHS to  
receive audio and video signals from DVD.  
When the DC channel is selected on VHS, you cannot select the  
TP channel on DVD.  
58  
VQT0N92  
         
Transferring (Dubbing)  
DVD VHS  
Transfer (Dubbing) from DVD  
When you transfer (dub) a whole disc  
Make sure that the DVD is stopped.  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
POWER  
When “PB” flashes on the unit’s display of the DVD side, resume  
function is activated.  
In this case, press [, STOP] to de-activate it. (l 21)  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
INPUT SELECT  
VHS  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
VHS  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
DVD  
When you transfer (dub) a title from the beginning of  
the selected title to the end of the disc  
When you transfer (dub) a playlist from the  
beginning of the selected playlist to the last playlist  
Press [1, PLAY] to play back the desired title or playlist  
(l 37).  
CH, W, X  
CANCEL/RESET  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
AUDIO  
SLOW/  
AUDIO  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
s+  
:, 9  
PLAY  
You can transfer (dub) (a title or playlist) while playback is  
paused by pressing [;, PAUSE].  
You cannot transfer (dub) the playlist which is longer than  
8 hours. (When you transfer (dub) multiple playlists, the playlist  
which is longer than 8 hours is omitted.)  
1
;
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
3, 4, 2, 1  
ENTER  
[1] Press and hold [VHS , DUBBING] for about 3  
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
seconds or more (until “START” on the unit’s  
S
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
JET REW  
display terminates flashing).  
On the main unit, press [VHS ].  
Check if transfer (dubbing) starts properly.  
The “DUBBING” indicator on the main unit  
lights.  
SCHEDULE  
REC  
REC MODE DVD ERASE ADD/DLT  
µ
CREATE  
REC MODE  
DUBBING  
VHS  
VCR/TV  
CHAPTER  
DVD  
VHS —  
Dubbing is automatically completed when  
playback of the disc is finished or the tape  
reaches its end.  
VHS  
DVD  
CH  
REC  
DUBBING  
VHS  
DVD  
/k1.3  
DUBBING indicator  
To stop transfer (dubbing) in the middle  
Press [, STOP].  
One Touch Transfer (dubbing)  
Note  
While One Touch Transfer (Dubbing) is activated, a scheduled  
recording cannot be started.  
When the transfer (dubbing) is not started or not executed, the  
“DUBBING” indicator blinks for about 7 seconds. Check if the unit is  
properly prepared.  
If you start transfer (dubbing) when “PB” is blinking on the unit’s  
display, the DVD is dubbed from the beginning of the title which  
you stopped.  
(DVD l VHS)  
You can transfer (dub) titles recorded on a disc° onto a tape with one  
touch of the button.  
In One Touch Transfer (dubbing), all contents on the disc are  
automatically dubbed onto the tape.  
° Available discs for transfer (dubbing) onto tape are [RAM] [-R]  
[-RW‹V›] [+R] [-RW‹VR›].  
Preparation  
About Recording VISS (l 54)  
Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.  
In One Touch Dubbing from DVD to VHS, the index signal is  
automatically recorded for each title. You can search desired titles  
with [: ] or [ 9].  
Index signals will not be recorded automatically in the manual  
transfer (dubbing) function (l 62). If you want to record index  
signals, press [¥, REC] on the remote controller at the position  
you want while transferring (dubbing) in VHS mode (l 10).  
DVD  
Insert the disc containing the program to be copied (l 8).  
VHS  
g
)
Insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.  
(l 48)  
Confirm that the remaining tape time is sufficient for recording.  
(l 55)  
n
i
r
ng  
er  
bi  
sf  
ub  
n
D
(
Select the recording mode. (l 51)  
59  
VQT0N92  
     
Transferring (Dubbing)  
DVD VHS  
[6] Register titles and playlists for transfer  
DVD/VHS POWER  
(dubbing).  
TV  
POWER  
If you are going to transfer a registered list without making any  
changes to it, press [4], then skip to step 7.  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
To set for the  
registration  
DUBBING  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
Current Remaining:  
Dubbing List:  
6:00  
0:00 ( 0%)  
Title Name  
VHS  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
Cancel All  
DVD  
Dubbing Direction  
No.  
Size  
DVD  
VHS  
(1)Make sure “Create List” is  
selected and press [1].  
(2)Make sure “New Entry (Total  
= 0)” is selected and press  
[ENTER].  
(3)Press [VHS /A] to select  
“Video” or press [DVD/B] to  
select “Playlists”.  
You can also select the view  
by selecting “Other View”  
from the SUB MENU.  
1Press [SUB MENU].  
2Make sure “Other View” is  
selected and press  
New Entry (Total = 0)  
Mode  
Video  
SP  
0
Numeric  
buttons  
Create List  
AUDIO  
DUBBING  
CANCEL/RESET  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
Current Remaining:  
Dubbing List:  
6:00  
0:00 ( 0%)  
Title Name  
Cancel All  
Dubbing Direction  
No.  
Size  
SLOW/  
DVD  
VHS  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
New Entry (Total = 0)  
Mode  
:, 9  
Video  
SP  
PLAY  
Create List  
DVD-RAM  
1
;
Video  
Playlists  
-
07  
08  
2:00 (SP)  
-
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
10 10/25 Mon  
123  
8
ABC  
10/25 Mon  
Create List  
DVD-RAM  
Video  
Playlists  
3, 4, 2, 1  
07  
08  
2:00 (SP)  
-
-
ENTER  
[ENTER] twice.  
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
10 10/25 Mon  
123  
ABC  
RETURN  
S
(4)Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select  
the title or playlist and press  
[ENTER].  
You can register multiple  
titles or playlists to the  
dubbing list by repeating the  
above steps 2-4.  
(Dubbing list display and  
convenient functions: l 61)  
“To show other pages” l  
below  
SUB MENU  
-
-
-
-
-
-
TIME SLIP  
DUBBING  
V  
CHAPTE
STATUS  
SCHEDULE  
DISPLAY  
JET REW  
VHS  
DVD  
VHS /A  
A
B
DVD/B  
Previous  
Page 02/02  
Next  
Previous  
ENTER  
SUB MENU Select  
Next  
DUBBING  
GUI (Graphical User Interface) Transfer  
(Dubbing)  
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›]  
Current Remaining:  
Dubbing List:  
No.  
01 2:00 SP (33%) ABC  
02 0:30 SP 7%) 123  
6:00  
Cancel All  
Dubbing Direction  
2:30 (42%)  
Title Name  
Size  
DVD  
VHS  
Mode  
(
Video  
SP  
New Entry (Total = 2)  
You can transfer (dub) multiple titles or playlists recorded on a disc  
onto a tape in combination.  
° Available discs for transfer (dub) onto tape are [RAM] [-RW‹VR›].  
Create List  
Page 01/01  
Create a dubbing list.  
Start Dubbing  
ENTER  
“Multiple editing” l below  
SUB MENU  
(5)Press [2].  
Before pressing [2], make  
sure that the value on  
“Dubbing list” is smaller than the value on “Current  
Remaining”.  
(6)Press [4].  
Preparation  
Registered titles  
Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.  
DVD  
Insert the disc containing the program to be copied (l 8).  
VHS  
Insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.  
(l 48)  
[7] When you finish creating the  
dubbing list,  
DUBBING  
Cancel All  
Dubbing Direction  
Confirm that the remaining tape time is sufficient for recording. (l 55)  
DVD  
VHS  
Make sure to select  
“Start Dubbing” and  
press [ENTER].  
The confirmation screen  
appears.  
Mode  
[1] Press [DVD].  
[2] While both DVD and VHS are stopped  
Press [FUNCTIONS].  
[3] Select “DUBBING” with [  
Press ENTER to start dubbing.  
Video  
SP  
2
Create List  
Start Dubbing  
ENTER  
3
,
4] and press [ENTER].  
[8] Select “Yes” with [2] and press [ENTER].  
[4] Set “Dubbing Direction”.  
Transfer (dubbing) is started.  
Set “Source” to “DVD”.  
If you are not going to change the dub direction, press [4],  
then skip to step 5.  
To change the setting  
To stop transfer (dubbing) in the middle  
Press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds or more.  
(1)Make sure “Dubbing Direction” is selected and press [1].  
(2)Make sure “Source” is selected and press [ENTER].  
Various operations  
To show other pages  
Press [:, SKIP] or [9, SKIP].  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press  
[ENTER] to show other pages.  
(3)Press [3, 4] to select “DVD”  
DUBBING  
and press [ENTER].  
Cancel All  
Source  
Dubbing Direction  
When you set “Source” to  
“DVD”, “VHS” is automatically  
selected on “Destination”.  
DVD  
VHS  
Destination  
Mode  
VHS-Video  
SP  
Multiple editing  
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;, PAUSE]. (Repeat)  
(4)Press [2].  
Press [ENTER] to register to the list.  
(5)Press [4].  
A check mark appears. Press [;, PAUSE] again to cancel.  
When you switch between the “Video” and “Playlists” tab, the  
check mark is canceled.  
Titles or playlists are registered to the dubbing list in ascending  
order of title number.  
[5] Set the recording mode.  
If you are not going to change  
the recording mode, press [4],  
DUBBING  
Cancel All  
Dubbing Direction  
Video  
SP  
Format  
DVD  
VHS  
Recording Mode  
Mode  
Video  
SP  
0
Create List  
To Change the setting  
(1)Make sure “Mode” is selected and press [1].  
(2)Make sure “Recording Mode” is selected and press [ENTER].  
(3)Select recording mode (SP, EP or VP) with [3, 4] and press  
[ENTER].  
(4)Press [2].  
(5)Press [4].  
60  
VQT0N92  
       
Transferring (Dubbing)  
DVD VHS  
To edit the transfer (dubbing) list  
Select the item in step 6 (4). (l 60)  
[1] Select a desired item with [3, 4] and press  
[SUB MENU].  
[2] Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press  
Transfer (Dubbing) a DVD-Video, finalized  
DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R  
You can transfer (dub) the contents of a disc being played onto a  
tape for the set time while playing the disc.  
Erase All  
Add  
[ENTER].  
Erase  
Operations and on screen displays during transfer  
(dubbing) are also recorded.  
Move  
Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent  
illegal copying, and cannot be transferred (dubbed).  
The following cannot be transferred (dubbed): DVD-Audio, Video  
CD, Audio CD and so on.  
Erase All:  
Erase all items registered on the transfer (dubbing) list.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].  
Add:  
After performing steps 1–5 of “GUI (Graphical User Interface)  
Transfer (Dubbing)” (l 60),  
Add new items to the transfer (dubbing) list.  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the titles and playlists to be added  
and press [ENTER].  
[6] Set “Time Limit”.  
DUBBING  
Cancel All  
If you are not going to change  
On  
Time Limit  
Set time  
Erase:  
Erase the selected item.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [ENTER].  
Multiple editing is possible. (l 60)  
Dubbing Direction  
the setting, press [4], then skip  
to step 7.  
DVD  
VHS  
2:00  
Mode  
DVD-Video  
SP  
Current Remaining: 2:00  
2:00  
Time Limit  
Setting the unit to  
transfer (dub) according  
to the set time  
Set the time limit.  
Start Dubbing  
Move:  
Move selected items or change the order of items on the transfer  
(dubbing) list.  
Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [ENTER].  
(1)Make sure “Time Limit” is  
selected and press [1].  
(2)Make sure “Time Limit” is selected and press [ENTER].  
To cancel all registered transfer (dubbing) settings and lists  
After performing steps 1–4 (l 60)  
Setting the unit to transfer (dub) all the content on the disc  
(3)Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [ENTER].  
(4)Press [2].  
[1] Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel  
DUBBING  
All” and press [ENTER].  
[2] Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”  
Cancel All  
Setting the transfer (dubbing) time  
Dubbing Direction  
DVD  
VHS  
(3)Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [ENTER].  
(4)Press [3, 4] to select “Set time” and press [ENTER].  
(5)Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press [3, 4]  
to set the recording time, and then press [ENTER].  
You can also set the set time with the numeric buttons.  
Maximum recording time is 8 hours.  
and press [ENTER].  
Mode  
Press ENTER to cancel all settings.  
Video  
SP  
The settings and lists may be  
canceled in the following situations.  
- When a title or a playlist has been recorded or erased at the  
transfer (dubbing) source.  
- When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit  
or open the tray.  
(6)Press [2].  
(7)Press [4].  
[7] Make sure “Start  
DUBBING  
Cancel All  
Dubbing” is selected  
Dubbing Direction  
DVD  
VHS  
and press [ENTER].  
Press [2] to select “Yes” and  
press [ENTER] to start transfer  
(dub).  
Mode  
DVD-Video  
SP  
Press ENTER to start dubbing.  
2:00  
Time Limit  
Start Dubbing  
ENTER  
The disc top menu is displayed.  
Disc play automatically begins  
from title 1 when “First Title” is selected from the “Playback will  
start with:” menu when finalizing the disc (l 31).  
[8] When the top menu is  
My favorite  
01/02  
01  
Chapter 1  
02  
Chapter 2  
displayed  
03  
04  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to  
select the title you want  
to start transferring  
(dubbing), and press  
[ENTER].  
Chapter 3  
Chapter 4  
05  
Chapter 5  
06  
Chapter 6  
07  
Chapter 7  
08  
Chapter 8  
g
)
n
i
r
Previous  
Play  
Next  
ng  
er  
bi  
sf  
ub  
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are  
recorded until the set time.  
n
D
(
After the last title on the disc has finished playing the top menu  
is recorded until the set time is reached.  
To stop transfer (dubbing) in the middle  
Press [, STOP] or press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 seconds  
or more.  
Note  
The screen on the right (screen saver) is recorded  
at the beginning.  
It is recorded as 1 title from the start of transfer  
(dubbing) to the end (even if there are multiple  
programs).  
If play does not begin automatically or if the top menu does not  
display automatically, press [1, PLAY] to start.  
You can select the desired part of the video and then transfer (dub)  
it while watching the video. (l 62)  
61  
VQT0N92  
   
Transferring (Dubbing)  
DVD VHS  
About DC channel  
(DC: Dubbing input channel)  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
POWER  
When the DC channel is selected, it becomes possible for VHS to  
receive audio and video signals from DVD. This enables dubbing  
from DVD to VHS.  
The DC channel can be selected by pressing [VHS] and  
pressing [INPUT SELECT] or [CH, W, X] several times.  
When you play back a disc after turning the channel to “DC”, the  
picture on DVD is displayed on the TV screen.  
Contrary to the DC channel, the TP channel enables DVD to  
receive audio and video signals from VHS.  
When the TP channel is selected on DVD, you cannot select the  
DC channel on VHS.  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
INPUT SELECT  
VHS  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
VHS  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
DVD  
CH, W, X  
SKIP/INDEX  
AUDIO  
PLAY  
1
;
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
FUNCTIONS  
REC  
REC MODE DVD ERASE ADD/DLT  
µ
TOP MENU  
COPYING  
VHS  
VHS MENU  
CREATE  
REC MODE  
VCR/TV  
CHAPTER  
DVD  
Manual Transfer (Dubbing)  
You can transfer (dub) titles recorded on a disc onto a tape by  
specifying the recording parts while watching them.  
Preparation  
Select the unit viewing channel (e.g. AV input) on the TV.  
DVD  
Insert the disc containing the title to be copied (l 8).  
Check the channel. If “TP” channel is selected, transfer (dubbing)  
does not work properly.  
- When the “TP” channel is selected on DVD, you cannot select the  
“DC” channel on VHS.  
VHS  
Insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.  
(l 48)  
Confirm that the remaining tape time is sufficient for recording.  
(l 55)  
[1] Press [DVD] and press [1, PLAY].  
Start playing the disc and find the start point of the recording.  
Select the audio to be played (the audio to be recorded)  
beforehand. [RAM]  
The audio from the TV is recorded. To record your favorite  
audio, select the audio by pressing [AUDIO]. (l 23) [RAM]  
When a DVD-R, a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or a +R is  
inserted, you cannot select the audio.  
[2] Press [;, PAUSE] at the start point of the  
recording.  
[3] Press [VHS].  
[4] Select “DC” channel with [INPUT SELECT] or  
[CH, W, X].  
The DVD picture is displayed on the TV.  
[5] Press [1, PLAY].  
Start playing the video cassette and find the start point of the  
recording.  
[6] Press [;, PAUSE] at the start point of the  
recording, then press [¥, REC].  
Put the unit in the recording standby mode.  
[7] Press [REC MODE] to select the recording  
mode. (l 51)  
[8] Press [;, PAUSE].  
VHS recording and disc play start at the same time.  
To pause or stop Manual Transfer (Dubbing)  
You cannot stop or pause DVD and VHS at the same time.  
To pause or stop recording  
Press [VHS] and press [;, PAUSE] or [, STOP].  
To pause or stop play  
Press [DVD] and press [;, PAUSE] or [, STOP].  
Note  
When the transfer (dubbing) is already started, you can switch the  
DVD/VHS output manually.  
62  
VQT0N92  
     
Transferring (Dubbing)  
DVD VHS  
Recording from an external device  
When connecting to the IN2 input terminals on the front of the  
unit  
POWER  
You can also connect to the IN1 input terminals on the rear of the  
unit.  
EJECT  
L/MONO  
S
VIDEO IN  
C
Before connecting any cables, first make sure that the power for  
the unit and the external device are off. Then, after connecting  
cables, turn on both.  
VIDEO IN  
AUDIO IN  
R
IN2  
Note  
When recording using the unit’s input terminals, only the sound  
received at the time of recording will be recorded. As long as  
secondary audio that is recorded on the media in the external device  
is not output to the unit in play, it is not recorded.  
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural, connect to L/  
MONO. (Both left and right channels are recorded when connected  
through L/MONO.)  
(1) Audio/Video cable (not supplied)  
A Yellow (VIDEO)  
B White (L)  
C Red (R)  
(2) S-Video cable (not supplied)  
(3) External device  
(2)  
(1)  
The S-VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the VIDEO  
terminal.  
(Playback equipment)  
(3)  
Preparation  
DVD [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
Release protection (disc l 30, cartridge l 30). [RAM]  
Press [DVD].  
VHS  
Insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab. (l 48)  
Press [VHS].  
[1] Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode. (DVD l 25, VHS l 51)  
DVD [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
- It is also possible to perform Flexible Recording (FR). (l 26)  
[2] While stopped  
Press [CH, W, X] or [INPUT SELECT] to select the input channel for the equipment you have  
connected.  
Select IN1 or IN2.  
1 DVD  
1 VHS  
Follow the above steps 1 to 2.  
Follow the above steps 1 to 2.  
[3] Start play on the external device.  
[4] Press [¥, REC] at the point where you want to  
[3] Press [1, PLAY].  
Start playing the video cassette and find the recording start  
point.  
start recording.  
[4] Press [;, PAUSE], then press [¥, REC].  
Put the unit in recording standby mode.  
[5] Start play on the external device.  
[6] Press [;, PAUSE] at the point where you want  
to start recording.  
To skip unwanted parts  
Press [;, PAUSE] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)  
g
)
n
i
r
ng  
er  
bi  
To stop recording  
sf  
ub  
Press [, STOP].  
n
D
(
For your reference  
Almost all videos and DVD software on sale have been treated to prevent illegal copying. Such software cannot be recorded.  
63  
VQT0N92  
         
Reference  
DVD VHS  
Glossary  
Bitstream  
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)  
This is a signal compressed and converted into digital form. It is  
converted back to a multi-channel audio signal, e.g., 5.1-channel, by  
a decoder.  
An audio compression method that compresses audio to  
approximately one-tenth of its size without any considerable loss of  
audio quality. You can play MP3s you have recorded onto CD-R and  
CD-RW.  
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)  
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to  
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with  
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.  
Pan & Scan/Letterbox  
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they will  
be viewed on a widescreen TV (16:9 aspect ratio), so images often  
don’t fit regular TVs (4:3 aspect ratio). 2 styles of picture,  
“Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.  
Decoder  
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This  
is called decoding.  
Pan & Scan:  
The sides are cut off so the picture fills the screen.  
Down-mixing  
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on  
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to  
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your TV’s  
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing. If this is the case, this  
unit can only output the front two channels.  
Letterbox:  
Black bands appear at the top and bottom of the  
picture so the picture itself appears in an aspect ratio  
of 16:9.  
Dynamic range  
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound  
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest  
level of sound before distortion occurs. Dynamic range compression  
means reducing the gap between the loudest and softest sounds.  
This means you can hear dialog clearly at low volume.  
Playback control (PBC)  
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and  
information with menus displayed on the screen.  
(The unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)  
Film and Video  
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. The unit can  
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable  
method of progressive output.  
Film is 24 or 30 frames per second, with motion picture film  
generally being 24 frames per second.  
Progressive/Interlace  
NTSC, the video signal standard, has 480 interlaced (i) scan lines,  
whereas progressive scanning uses twice the number of scan lines.  
This is called 480p.  
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video  
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.  
Your TV must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.  
Video is 60 fields per second (2 fields making up 1 frame).  
Finalize  
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc.  
possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalize  
DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R on the unit. After  
finalizing, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer record  
or edit. However, finalized DVD-RW can be formatted to become  
recordable.  
Protection  
You can prevent accidental erasure by setting writing protection or  
erasure protection.  
Sampling frequency  
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave  
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital  
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per  
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the  
original sound.  
Formatting  
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM  
recordable on recording equipment.  
You can format DVD-RAM and DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format)  
on the unit.  
Formatting irrevocably erases all contents on the disc.  
Thumbnail  
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display  
multiple pictures in the form of a list.  
Frame and field  
Frame refers to the single images that constitute the video you see  
on your TV. Each frame consists of 2 fields.  
TIFF (Tag Image File Format)  
This is a system used for compressing/decoding color still pictures, a  
common format for storing high quality images on digital cameras  
and other devices.  
Frame  
Field  
Field  
+
=
A frame still shows 2 fields, so there may be some blurring between  
them, but picture quality is generally better.  
A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but  
there is no blurring.  
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)  
This is a system used for compressing/decoding color still pictures. If  
you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc., the  
data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The  
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering the  
degree of compression.  
64  
VQT0N92  
                       
Reference  
DVD VHS  
Frequently asked questions  
Set up  
Page  
What equipment is necessary to  
play multi channel surround  
sound?  
DVD-Video:  
You can play DVD-Video multi channel surround by digitally connecting an amplifier  
equipped with a Dolby Digital and a DTS decoder.  
DVD-Audio:  
15  
This unit plays DVD-Audio in 2 channels. You cannot play multi channel surround sound.  
Can the headphones and speakers You cannot directly connect to the unit. Connect through the amplifier etc.  
be directly connected to the unit?  
15  
15  
The TV has both S-VIDEO IN  
terminal and COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN terminals. Which terminal should  
I connect with?  
We recommend the COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminal. Component signal outputs the  
color difference signals (PB/PR) and luminance signal (Y) separately in order to achieve  
high fidelity in reproducing colors. If the TV is compatible with progressive output, a high  
quality picture can be output because the unit’s component video output terminal outputs  
a progressive output signal.  
Is my TV progressive output  
compatible?  
All Panasonic TVs that have 480p input terminals are compatible. Consult the  
manufacturer if you have another brand of TV.  
Disc  
Page  
Can I play DVD-Video, DVD-Audio  
and Video CDs bought in another  
country?  
You can play them if the video standard is NTSC.  
However, you cannot play DVD-Video if its region number does not include “1” or “ALL”.  
7
Can a DVD-Video that does not  
have a region number be played?  
The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a standard. You cannot  
play discs that do not have a region number.  
Please tell me about DVD-R, DVD-  
RW, +R and +RW compatibility with  
the unit.  
The unit records and plays DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R, and plays  
DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format) and +RW.  
The unit also records and plays high speed recording compatible DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R  
discs.  
6, 7  
6
Please tell me about CD-R and  
CD-RW compatibility with the unit.  
This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of the following  
standards: CD-DA, Video CD, MP3 and still pictures (JPEG/TIFF). Close the session or  
finalize the disc after recording. This unit can recognize up to 99 folders (groups) and 999  
files (tracks) on a disc with MP3 or still pictures (JPEG/TIFF).  
7, 23,  
24  
You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with the unit.  
7
Recording  
Page  
Can I record from a commercially  
purchased video cassette or DVD?  
Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy protected; therefore,  
recording is usually not possible.  
Can DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video  
format) and +R recorded on the unit  
be played on other equipment?  
You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players after finalizing the disc on  
this unit. However, depending on the condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and  
capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.  
31  
Can I record digital audio signals  
using the unit?  
You cannot record digital signals. The digital audio terminals on the unit are for output  
only.  
Can a digital audio signal from the You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the “Digital Audio  
44  
unit be recorded to other  
equipment?  
Output” settings to the following from the SETUP menu.  
- PCM Down Conversion “On”  
- Dolby Digital “PCM”  
- DTS “PCM”  
However, only  
- As long as digital recording from the disc is permitted.  
- As long as the recording equipment is compatible with 48 kHz of sampling frequency.  
You cannot record MP3 signals.  
Can I switch to SAP during  
recording?  
With DVD-RAM, you can, and the audio recorded also changes. Just press [AUDIO].  
With DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R you cannot. Change before recording  
with “Select MTS” in the SETUP menu.  
25  
44  
e
nc  
e
r
e
f
Re  
65  
VQT0N92  
 
Reference  
DVD VHS  
Error messages  
Common  
On the unit’s display  
Page  
H, F  
An error has occurred. The number following “H” or “F” depends on the status of the unit. Check  
(“” stands for a number.)  
the items in the “Error messages” section and the “Troubleshooting guide”. If the service number  
still does not disappear after the check, follow the Reset procedure described below.  
Reset procedure: (“The unit is on but cannot be operated.” l 68)  
If the service numbers fail to clear, note the service numbers and contact a qualified service person.  
DVD  
On the TV  
Page  
Cannot finish recording  
completely.  
The program was copy-protected.  
The disc may be full.  
There are already 99 recorded titles ([+R] 49 recorded titles).  
Cannot play.  
You inserted an incompatible disc (Discs recorded in PAL video, etc.).  
8
Cannot record on the disc.  
Unable to format.  
The disc may be dirty or scratched.  
Please check the disc.  
Cannot record. Disc is full.  
Create space by erasing any unwanted titles. [RAM] [-RW‹V›]  
[Even if you erase recorded content from the DVD-R or +R, there is no increase in disc space. Available  
disc space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) increases only when the last recorded title is erased.]  
Use a new disc.  
22, 30,  
33  
Cannot record. The number  
of titles has exceeded the  
maximum limit.  
Error has occurred. Please  
press ENTER.  
Press [ENTER] to start recovery process. You cannot operate the unit while it is recovering  
(“SLF CHECK” appears on the unit’s display).  
No disc  
You haven’t inserted a disc. Correctly insert a disc that the unit can play.  
The disc is upside down. If it is a single-sided disc, insert it so the label is facing up.  
6, 8  
8
Please change the disc.  
There may be a problem with the disc. Press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] to remove it and check it for  
8
scratches or dirt. (The unit turns off automatically after you open the tray.)  
This is a non-recordable disc. The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalized DVD-R, DVD-  
RW (DVD-Video format) or +R.  
You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM or DVD-RW. Format the disc with the unit.  
This disc is not formatted  
properly.  
31  
21  
The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.  
On the unit’s display  
Page  
CHK REMOTE  
The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote  
19  
(“” stands for a number.)  
control.  
HARD ERR  
NO READ  
If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.  
The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.  
You have used a lens cleaner and it has finished. Press [<, OPEN/CLOSE] to eject the disc.  
8
8
PLEASE WAIT  
Displayed when the unit is started. This is not a malfunction.  
The unit is carrying out its recovery process. You cannot operate the unit while “PLEASE WAIT”  
is displayed.  
PROG FULL  
SLF CHECK  
There are already 16 scheduled recording programs. Delete unnecessary scheduled recording programs. 29, 53  
There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is  
carrying out its recovery process. Wait until the message disappears.  
If “Quick Start” is set to “On”, “PLEASE WAIT” is displayed while the unit is carrying out its  
recovery process. You cannot operate the unit while this is displayed.  
UNSUPPORT  
UNFORMAT  
You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on.  
7
You have inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM or DVD-RW that is unformatted or recorded on  
31  
other equipment.  
U59  
The unit is very warm.  
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message disappears.  
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the  
rear of the unit.  
U99  
The unit fails to operate properly. Press [POWER Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to  
standby. Now press [POWER Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.  
VHS  
On the TV  
Page  
PLEASE PUT IN A VIDEO  
CASSETTE.  
A video cassette is not inserted when recording programs or setting the scheduled recording.  
Insert a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.  
48  
PLEASE SET THE CLOCK.  
The clock is not set when recording programs or setting the scheduled recording. Set the clock.  
46  
48  
PLEASE USE A CASSETTE  
WITH TAB.  
A video cassette without the accidental erasure prevention tab is inserted when recording programs or  
setting the scheduled recording. Use a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.  
66  
VQT0N92  
       
Reference  
DVD VHS  
Troubleshooting guide  
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the remedies indicated in the  
chart do not solve the problem, refer to the “Customer Services Directory” on page 73 if you reside in the U.S.A., or refer to “Product  
information” on page 72 if you reside in Canada. In other areas, consult your dealer.  
The following do not indicate a problem with the unit:  
Regular disc rotating sound. The sound of the disc rotating may become louder especially when finalizing a DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video  
format) or +R.  
Poor reception due to atmospheric condition.  
Image disturbance during search.  
Periodic interruptions to reception due to satellite broadcasting breaks.  
Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a Panasonic disc.)  
The unit freezes due to the activation of one of its safety devices. (Press and hold [POWER Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds.)  
Common  
Power  
Page  
No power  
Insert the AC power supply cord securely into a known active AC outlet.  
13  
The unit switches to the standby This is a power saving feature. Change “Off Timer” in the “SETUP” menu, if you would prefer.  
43  
mode.  
One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [POWER Í/I] on the main unit to turn the  
unit on.  
Displays  
The display is dim.  
Page  
45  
Change “Front Display” in the SETUP menu.  
“12:00” is flashing on the unit’s Set the clock.  
46  
display.  
The recording time display, the The time on the unit’s display and the remaining recording time on the screen may be  
transfer (dubbing) process  
display and the displayed  
recording time of MP3 are  
different from the actual time.  
indicated less or more than the actual value.  
In DVD-R or +R, the remaining capacity does not increase even if titles are erased.  
Available recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) increases only when the last  
recorded title is erased. It does not increase if other titles are erased.  
If you repeat recording or editing about 200 times or more, the remaining capacity of the DVD-  
R or the +R is reduced and then recording or editing may be disabled.  
The time during fast forward and rewind, or the process during transfer (dub) may not be  
displayed accurately.  
Compared to the actual  
recorded time, the elapsed time  
displayed is less.  
The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames at 29.97 frames  
(equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight difference between the time  
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g.,actual one-hour elapsed time may display as  
approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.  
The tape counter isn’t changing. The tape counter does not change while playing unrecorded parts. The “second” display  
changes as follows:  
The unit’s display also appears like this if the tape is dirty or damaged. Consult your dealer if  
this is the case.  
e
nc  
e
r
e
f
Re  
67  
VQT0N92  
   
Reference  
DVD VHS  
Operation  
Page  
Cannot operate the TV.  
Change manufacturer code. Some TVs cannot be operated even if you change the code.  
19  
Press [TV/VIDEO] to change the input mode to “TV”.  
26, 51  
Cannot operate the DVD.  
Cannot operate the VHS.  
Press [DVD] when operating DVD.  
10  
10  
Press [VHS] when operating VHS.  
The remote control doesn’t  
work.  
The remote control code is wrong. Change to the correct code.  
The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.  
Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the main unit.  
Remove obstacles between the remote control and main unit.  
Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject to sunlight  
exposure.  
19  
11  
11  
If you repeatedly insert discs or turn the unit on and off about 50 times or more, the recording  
or editing of DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R may be disabled.  
The unit is on but cannot be  
operated.  
Some operations are prohibited by the disc.  
The unit is warm (“U59” appears on the unit’s display). Wait until “U59” disappears.  
One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.  
Reset the unit as follows:  
(1) Press [POWER Í/I] on the main unit to switch to standby.  
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [POWER Í/I] on the main unit for  
about 10 seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.  
Alternatively, disconnect the AC power supply cord, wait for about 1 minute, then  
reconnect it.  
(2) Press [POWER Í/I] to turn the unit on.  
Cannot eject a disc.  
Startup is slow  
The unit is recording  
The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, hold down [] and [CH, W] on DVD side of  
the main unit simultaneously for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.  
Make sure that “Quick Start” is set to “On”.  
Even if “Quick start” is set to “On”, startup is slow if the clock is not set, there was a power  
failure or the AC plug has just been connected.  
A few dozen seconds after turning on the unit, you can play a disc or start recording to discs  
other than DVD-RAM.  
43  
Startup takes time for a few minutes after 4:00 a.m. due to system maintenance of this unit.  
Takes time to read DVD-RAM  
Picture  
It may take time to read a disc if it is being used for the first time in this unit or it has not been  
used for a long time.  
Page  
TV reception worsens after  
connecting the unit.  
This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment. It  
can be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers.  
The images from the unit do not Make sure that the TV is connected to the VIDEO OUT terminal, S-VIDEO OUT terminal or  
13, 15  
appear on the TV.  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals on the unit.  
Make sure that the TV’s input setting (e.g., VIDEO 1) is correct.  
The TV isn’t compatible with progressive signals. Press and hold [] and [DVD, DUBBING]  
on DVD of the main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. The setting will change to  
interlace.  
Picture is distorted.  
68  
VQT0N92  
 
Reference  
DVD VHS  
Recording, Scheduled recording, Transfer (dubbing), External input  
Page  
Scheduled recording does not  
work properly.  
When connected to cable TV box or satellite receiver, the VCR Plus_ system does not work.  
The scheduled recording program is incorrect or different scheduled recording times overlap. 29, 53  
Correct the program.  
VCR Plus_ system does not  
work properly.  
The clock is not correct. Set the clock.  
46  
17  
17  
Correct the guide channels with “VCR Plus_ Ch. Setting” in the SETUP menu.  
The same guide channel is set to 2 or more channel positions. Set the guide channel correctly  
or delete unnecessary channels.  
Scheduled recording will not be activated during formatting, transfer (dubbing) and other such  
operations which should not be interrupted when they are being carried out.  
Scheduled recording does not  
stop even when [, STOP] is  
pressed.  
29, 53  
43  
Press [, STOP] and then [ENTER] within 5 seconds to turn “ ” off. Recording stops.  
If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while “Quick Start” is set to “On”,  
you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.  
The scheduled recording  
program remains even after  
recording finishes.  
The scheduled recording program remains if set to daily or weekly.  
29, 53  
Cannot transfer (dub) VHS to  
DVD.  
The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to “PROTECT” or the disc is protected with “DISC  
MANAGEMENT”.  
“TP” channel is not selected on DVD when recording from a video tape to a disc. Select “TP”  
channel.  
Some video tapes on the market (including rental videos) are copy-protected to prevent illegal  
reproductions. Copy-protected video tapes cannot be properly recorded.  
You cannot use the transfer (dubbing) function when the FUNCTIONS window, the Scheduled  
Recording List screen, the VHS menu screen, etc. are displayed.  
30  
58  
Cannot transfer (dub) DVD to  
VHS.  
A video cassette without the accidental erasure prevention tab is inserted. Use a video  
cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.  
“DC” channel is not selected on VHS when recording from a disc to a video tape. Select “DC”  
channel.  
Some DVDs on the market (including rental DVD) are copy-protected to prevent illegal  
reproductions. Copy-protected DVDs cannot be properly recorded.  
You cannot use the transfer (dubbing) function when the FUNCTIONS window, the Scheduled  
Recording List screen, the VHS menu screen, etc. are displayed.  
48  
62  
The sound level after editing is The sound level on DVD and VHS may not match depending on the disc. When the sound  
not equal on DVD and on VHS.  
level in a particular part of the sound source is soft or loud, the sound may be recorded loudly  
or softly on a video tape.  
Stripe-shaped black noise is  
recorded.  
The device in playback is interfering with the TV because the device is too close to the TV.  
Move the device away from the TV.  
Cannot record video or sound  
from the external device.  
The external device is not correctly connected.  
The proper external input channel (IN1 or IN2) is not selected.  
63  
63  
e
nc  
e
r
e
f
Re  
69  
VQT0N92  
Reference  
DVD VHS  
DVD  
DVD Picture  
Page  
45  
Status messages do not appear. Select “Automatic” in “Status Messages” in the SETUP menu.  
The blue background does not Select “On” in “Blue Background” in the SETUP menu.  
45  
appear.  
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture  
expands left and right.  
Use the TV to change the aspect. If your TV does not have that function, set “Progressive” in  
the Video menu to “Off”.  
41  
Check the settings for “TV Type”, “4:3 TV Settings for DVD-Video”, or “4:3 TV Settings for  
DVD-RAM” in the SETUP menu.  
45  
41  
41  
Screen size is wrong.  
There is a lot of after-image  
when playing video.  
Set “MPEG-DNR” in the Video menu to “Off”.  
When playing DVD-Video using Set “Progressive” in the Video menu to “Off”. This problem is caused by the editing method or  
progressive output, one part of  
the picture momentarily appears  
to be doubled up.  
material used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.  
There is no apparent change in The effect cannot be seen with certain types of video.  
picture quality when adjusted  
with the Video menu in the on-  
screen menus.  
DVD Sound  
Page  
No sound.  
Low volume.  
Check the connections and “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input mode on the  
amplifier if you have connected one.  
13–15,  
44  
Distorted sound.  
Cannot hear the desired audio  
type.  
Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.  
23, 25  
41  
Set “V.S.S.” in the Audio menu to “Off” in the following cases.  
- When using discs that do not have surround sound effects such as Karaoke discs.  
- When playing MTS broadcast titles.  
The disc may have a restriction on the method of audio output. If “D.MIX” does not appear in  
the display when playing multi-channel DVD-Audio, only audio for the two front channels will  
be output. Refer to the disc’s jacket. [DVD-A]  
Cannot switch audio.  
You cannot change the audio type when a DVD-R, a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or a +R is  
in the disc tray.  
You cannot change the audio type when playing a DVD-R, a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or  
a +R. (You can select “Main” or “Secondary Audio Program (SAP)” in “Select MTS” in the  
SETUP menu before recording.)  
44  
You have used a digital connection. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using audio  
cables (analog connection).  
There are discs whose audio cannot be changed because of how the disc was created.  
15, 44  
DVD Play  
Page  
Play fails to start even when  
[1, PLAY] is pressed.  
Play starts but then stops  
immediately.  
Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.  
The disc is dirty.  
You tried to play a blank disc or a disc that is unplayable on the unit.  
You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalized on the equipment used for recording.  
When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8H) mode, play may not be possible on DVD players  
that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use EP (6H) mode.  
8
8
6, 7  
43  
Audio and video momentarily  
pause.  
This occurs between playlist chapters.  
This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.  
21  
DVD-Video is not played.  
Some DVD-Video cannot be played when you change the ratings level.  
43  
Alternative sound track and  
subtitles cannot be selected.  
Multiple languages are not recorded on the disc.  
You may have to use the disc’s own menus to select languages.  
21  
No subtitles.  
When progressive output is on, closed captions cannot be displayed.  
Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.  
Set “Subtitle” in the Disc menu to “On”.  
40  
Angle cannot be changed.  
This function depends on software availability. Angles can only be changed during scenes  
where different angles are recorded.  
You have forgotten your ratings With the tray open, keep pressing [¥, REC] and [1/k1.3] on DVD side of the main unit  
password.  
simultaneously for about 5 or more seconds.  
Quick View does not work.  
This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.  
This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.  
The resume play function does This function only works when “PB” is flashing in the unit’s display.  
not work. Memorized positions are canceled when the unit is turned off or when the tray is opened. The  
memorized position on the playlist is also canceled when the playlist and title are edited.  
21  
70  
VQT0N92  
 
Reference  
DVD VHS  
DVD recording, scheduled recording  
Page  
Cannot record.  
You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the  
6
unit can record onto.  
The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›]  
31  
The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to “PROTECT” or the disc is protected with  
“DISC MANAGEMENT”.  
30  
Some programs have limitations on the number of times they can be recorded (CPRM).  
The disc is full or nearly full. Erase unneeded titles or use another disc.  
You cannot record on finalized DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or DVD-RW  
(DVD Video Recording format) discs.  
6, 64  
22, 30, 33  
31  
If you repeatedly insert discs or turn the unit on and off about 50 times or more, the  
recording or editing of DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R may be disabled.  
A DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R recorded on the unit may not be recordable  
on other Panasonic DVD recorders.  
The material you are trying to record is copy-protected.  
Scheduled recording will not be activated when in editing or transfer (dub). Scheduled  
recording will begin after the editing/transfer (dub) is finished.  
A part or whole of a recorded  
title has been lost.  
If the power shuts down or the plug is disconnected from the household AC outlet while  
recording or editing, the program may be lost or the disc may become unusable. We cannot  
offer any guarantee regarding lost titles or discs. You will have to format the disc  
([RAM] [-RW‹V›]) or use a new disc.  
DVD Edit  
Page  
Cannot format.  
The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.  
You tried formatting a disc that is not compatible with the unit.  
8
7
Cannot create chapters.  
The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off or remove  
the disc. The information is not written if there is an interruption in the power before this.  
These operations are not possible with still pictures.  
You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an end point  
before a start point.  
Cannot mark the start point or  
the end point during “Shorten  
Titleoperation.  
Cannot erase chapters.  
When the chapter is too short to erase, use “Combine Chapters” to make the chapter  
35  
longer.  
The available recording time  
doesn’t increase even after  
Available recording space on the DVD-R or the +R does not increase even after erasing  
previously recorded titles.  
erasing recordings on the disc. Available recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) increases only when the last  
recorded title is erased. It does not increase if other titles are erased.  
Cannot create a playlist.  
You cannot select all the chapters in a title at once as the source of playlist edition if the title  
also includes still pictures. Select them individually.  
VHS  
VHS Picture  
Page  
OSD messages do not appear.  
Go to VHS MENU and select “ON” in “OSD”.  
54, 55  
Press [STATUS] to show the on-screen messages constantly.  
The blue back appears during  
play.  
You are playing a blank or poor quality part of the tape.  
You can damage the unit if you play dirty or damaged tapes and this can cause the blue  
back to appear. Consult your dealer.  
VHS Sound  
Page  
Cannot hear the desired audio  
type.  
Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.  
55  
There is noise when playing a  
video tape.  
Adjust the tracking.  
The tape is old or damaged.  
50  
VHS Play  
Page  
Cannot play.  
Tapes recorded under a TV system other than NTSC (PAL, SECAM, etc.) cannot be  
e
played.  
nc  
e
r
The playback screen flickers.  
The video head is dirty.  
The tape is too old or damaged.  
e
f
Re  
VHS Recording, scheduled recording  
Page  
1” flashes when I try to start The erasure prevention tab has been removed. Cover the hole with adhesive tape.  
48  
recording.  
Cannot record.  
Cannot record TV program.  
The desired channel is not selected. Select the desired TV program.  
71  
VQT0N92  
 
Reference  
Product Service  
1. Damage requiring service — The unit should be serviced by qualified service personnel if:  
(a)The AC power supply cord or AC adaptor has been damaged; or  
(b)Objects or liquids have gotten into the unit; or  
(c)The unit has been exposed to rain; or  
(d)The unit does not operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or  
(e)The unit has been dropped or the cabinet damaged.  
2. Servicing — Do not attempt to service the unit beyond that described in these operating instructions. Refer all other servicing to authorized  
servicing personnel.  
3. Replacement parts — When parts need replacing ensure the servicer uses parts specified by the manufacturer or parts that have the  
same characteristics as the original parts. Unauthorized substitutes may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards.  
4. Safety check — After repairs or service, ask the servicer to perform safety checks to confirm that the unit is in proper working condition.  
Product information  
For product information or assistance with product operation:  
In the U.S.A., refer to “Customer Services Directory” on page 73.  
authorized Servicentre closest to you.  
User memo:  
The model number and serial number of this product can be  
found on either the back or the bottom of the unit.  
Please note them in the space provided below and keep for future  
reference.  
DATE OF PURCHASE  
DEALER NAME  
DEALER ADDRESS  
MODEL NUMBER  
SERIAL NUMBER  
DMR-ES30V  
TELEPHONE NUMBER  
72  
VQT0N92  
   
Reference  
Limited Warranty (ONLY FOR U.S.A.)  
Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company,  
Division of Panasonic Corporation of North America  
One Panasonic Way Secaucus, New Jersey 07094  
Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc.  
Ave. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5  
San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina, Puerto Rico 00985  
Panasonic DVD Recorder  
Limited Warranty  
Limited Warranty Coverage  
Limited Warranty Limits And Exclusions  
If your product does not work properly because of a defect in materials or workmanship,  
Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company or Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc. (collectively  
referred to as “the warrantor”) will, for the length of the period indicated on the chart below,  
which starts with the date of original purchase (“warranty period”), at its option either (a)  
repair your product with new or refurbished parts, or (b) replace it with a new or a  
refurbished product. The decision to repair or replace will be made by the warrantor.  
This warranty ONLY COVERS failures due to defects in materials or workmanship, and  
DOES NOT COVER normal wear and tear or cosmetic damage. The warranty ALSO DOES  
NOT COVER damages which occurred in shipment, or failures which are caused by  
products not supplied by the warrantor, or failures which result from accidents, misuse,  
abuse, neglect, mishandling, misapplication, alteration, faulty installation, set-up  
adjustments, misadjustment of consumer controls, improper maintenance, power line surge,  
lightning damage, modification, or commercial use (such as in a hotel, office, restaurant, or  
other business), rental use of the product, service by anyone other than a Factory  
Servicenter or other Authorized Servicer, or damage that is attributable to acts of God.  
Product or Part Name  
Parts  
Labor  
DVD Recorder  
One (1) Year  
One (1) Year  
THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES EXCEPT AS LISTED UNDER  
“LIMITED WARRANTY COVERAGE”. THE WARRANTOR IS NOT LIABLE  
FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM  
THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF  
THIS WARRANTY. (As examples, this excludes damages for lost time, travel  
to and from the servicer, loss of media or images, data or other recorded  
content. The items listed are not exclusive, but are for illustration only.) ALL  
EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF  
MERCHANTABILITY, ARE LIMITED TO THE PERIOD OF THE LIMITED  
WARRANTY.  
Rechargeable Batteries,  
DVD-RAM Disc (in  
exchange for defective  
item)  
Ten (10) Days  
Not Applicable  
During the “Labor” warranty period there will be no charge for labor. During the “Parts”  
warranty period, there will be no charge for parts. You must carry-in or mail-in your product  
during the warranty period. If non-rechargeable batteries are included, they are not  
warranted. This warranty only applies to products purchased and serviced in the United  
States or Puerto Rico. This warranty is extended only to the original purchaser of a new  
product which was not sold “as is”. A purchase receipt or other proof of the original purchase  
date is required for warranty service.  
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or  
consequential damages, or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts,  
so the exclusions may not apply to you.  
Carry-In or Mail-In Service  
For Carry-In or Mail-In Service in the United States call 1-800-211-PANA (7262) or visit  
For assistance in Puerto Rico call Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc. (787)-750-4300 or fax  
(787)-768-2910.  
This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other  
rights which vary from state to state. If a problem with this product develops  
during or after the warranty period, you may contact your dealer or Servicenter.  
If the problem is not handled to your satisfaction, then write to the warrantor’s  
Consumer Affairs Department at the addresses listed for the warrantor.  
PARTS AND SERVICE WHICH ARE NOT COVERED BY THIS  
LIMITED WARRANTY ARE YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.  
Customer Services Directory  
Obtain Product Information and Operating Assistance; locate your nearest Dealer or Servicenter; purchase Parts  
and Accessories; or make Customer Service and Literature requests by visiting our Web Site at:  
or, contact us via the web at:  
You may also contact us directly at:  
1-800-211-PANA (7262),  
Monday-Friday 9 am-9 pm; Saturday-Sunday 10 am-7 pm, EST.  
For hearing or speech impaired TTY users, TTY : 1-877-833-8855  
Accessory Purchases  
Purchase Parts, Accessories and Instruction Books online for all Panasonic Products by visiting our Web Site at:  
or, send your request by E-mail to:  
You may also contact us directly at:  
1-800-332-5368 (Phone) 1-800-237-9080 (Fax Only) (Monday – Friday 9 am to 8 pm, EST.)  
Panasonic Services Company  
20421 84th Avenue South, Kent, WA 98032  
e
nc  
e
r
(We Accept Visa, MasterCard, Discover Card, American Express, and Personal Checks)  
e
f
Re  
For hearing or speech impaired TTY users, TTY : 1-866-605-1277  
Service in Puerto Rico  
Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc.  
Ave. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5, San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina, Puerto Rico 00985  
Phone (787)750-4300, Fax (787)768-2910  
F1003  
73  
VQT0N92  
     
Reference  
Limited Warranty (ONLY FOR CANADA)  
Panasonic Canada Inc.  
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 2T3  
PANASONIC/TECHNICS PRODUCT—LIMITED WARRANTY  
Panasonic Canada Inc. warrants this product to be free from defects in material and workmanship and agrees to remedy any such defect for a  
period as stated below from the date of original purchase.  
Panasonic DVD Recorder One (1) year, parts and labour  
LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS  
This warranty does not apply to products purchased outside Canada or to any product which has been improperly installed, subjected to  
usage for which the product was not designed, misused or abused, damaged during shipping, or which has been altered or repaired in any  
way that affects the reliability or detracts from the performance, nor does it cover any product which is used commercially. Dry cell batteries  
are also excluded from coverage under this warranty.  
This warranty is extended to the original end user purchaser only. A purchase receipt or other proof of date of original purchase is required  
before warranty service is performed.  
THIS EXPRESS, LIMITED WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
IN NO EVENT WILL PANASONIC CANADA INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.  
In certain instances, some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or the exclusion of  
implied warranties, so the above limitations and exclusions may not be applicable.  
WARRANTY SERVICE  
For product operation and information assistance, please contact your Dealer or our Customer Care Centre at:  
For product repairs, please contact one of the following:  
Your Dealer who will inform you of an authorized Servicentre nearest you.  
A Panasonic Factory Servicentre listed below:  
Richmond,  
Calgary, Alberta  
Mississauga, Ontario  
Lachine, Québec  
British Columbia  
Panasonic Canada Inc.  
12111 Riverside Way  
Richmond, BC  
V6W 1K8  
Tel: (604) 278-4211  
Fax: (604) 278-5627  
Panasonic Canada Inc.  
Panasonic Canada Inc.  
5770 Ambler Dr.  
Mississauga, ON  
L4W 2T3  
Tel: (905) 624-8447  
Fax: (905) 238-2418  
Panasonic Canada Inc.  
3075, rue Louis A. Amos  
Lachine, QC  
H8T 1C4  
Tel: (514) 633-8684  
Fax: (514) 633-8020  
th  
6835-8 St. N. E.  
Calgary, AB  
T2E 7H7  
Tel: (403) 295-3955  
Fax: (403) 274-5493  
IF YOU SHIP THE PRODUCT TO A SERVICENTRE  
Carefully pack and send prepaid, adequately insured and preferably in the original carton.  
Include details of the defect claimed, and proof of date of original purchase.  
74  
VQT0N92  
   
Reference  
Specifications  
VHS  
Recording format  
Heads  
Power Supply:  
Power Consumption:  
AC 120k(1 10%)V, 50/60 Hz 10%  
31 W  
(Approx. 10 W in Quick start standby  
mode/Approx. 9 W in power save mode)  
(Approx. 4 W in Normal standby mode/  
Approx. 2 W in power save mode)  
VHS Video Cassette System Standard with FM audio  
4 helical scan heads for video  
2 helical scan heads for FM audio  
1 fixed head for Normal audio  
NTSC SP: 33.35 mm/s, 120 min  
NTSC EP: 11.12 mm/s, 360 min  
(with T-120 cassette)  
Recording modes/  
recording time  
DVD  
Recording format  
others  
FF/REW: approx. 54 s,  
Jet REW: approx. 36 s (with T-120 cassette)  
DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format  
DVD-R, DVD-RW: DVD-Video format  
Video: MPEG2  
Video data  
Audio: Dolby Digital 2 CH  
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units  
(wavelength: 662 nm for DVD, 795 nm for CD)  
Horizontal resolution: More than 200 lines  
Signal to Noise Ratio: More than SP: 40 dB  
EP: 40 dB  
Frequency Response: SP, EP: j4.5 to 4.0 dB at 2 MHz (0 dB at 0.1 MHz)  
Audio data  
Optical pickup  
Recording disc  
DVD-RAM: Ver. 2.0  
Ver. 2.1/3k-SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 1.0  
Ver. 2.2/5k-SPEED DVD-RAM Revision 2.0  
for General Ver. 2.0  
for General Ver. 2.0/4k-SPEED DVD-R Revision 1.0  
Dynamic Range:  
Hi-Fi: more than 90 dB  
Frequency Response: Hi-Fi: 20 Hz to 20 kHz (0 dB 3 dB)  
Normal SP: 80 Hz to 8 kHz (0 dB 4 dB)  
Normal EP: 80 Hz to 4 kHz (j1 dB 5 dB)  
Signal to Noise Ratio: Hi-Fi: more than 65 dB  
Normal SP: more than 43 dB  
DVD-R:  
+R:  
for General Ver. 2.x/8k-SPEED DVD-R Revision 3.0  
DVD-RW: Ver. 1.1  
Ver. 1.1/2k-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 1.0  
Ver. 1.2/4k-SPEED DVD-RW Revision 2.0  
Ver. 1.0  
Ver. 1.1  
Ver. 1.2  
XP: approx. 10 Mbps/approx. 60 min  
SP: approx. 5 Mbps/approx. 120 min  
LP: approx. 2.5 Mbps/approx. 240 min  
EP: approx. 1.7/1.2 Mbps/approx. 360/480 min  
(with 4.7 GB disc)  
DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R, +RW,  
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, Video CD, CD-Audio (CD-DA),  
CD-R/CD-RW (MP3, JPEG, CD-DA, Video CD  
formatted discs)  
Normal EP: more than 41 dB  
Cross Talk:  
Wow and Flutter:  
More than 50 dB at 1 kHz (Hi-Fi)  
Hi-Fi: less than 0.005%  
Normal SP: 0.2% max  
Normal EP: 0.4% max  
Recording mode/  
recording time  
DVD/VHS Common  
Video interface  
TV system:  
Input:  
NTSC  
Playable discs  
L1:  
RCA:  
CVBS: 1 Vp-p  
Zin: 75 ohm  
Zin: 75 ohm  
Zin: 75 ohm  
Zin: 75 ohm  
Zout: 75 ohm  
S-Video:  
Y: 1 Vp-p, C: 0.286 Vp-p  
Video interface  
Output:  
L2:  
RCA:  
S-Video:  
CVBS: 1 Vp-p  
Y: 1 Vp-p, C: 0.286 Vp-p  
RCA:  
S-Video:  
CVBS: 1 Vp-p  
Y: 1 Vp-p, C: 0.286 Vp-p  
Zout: 75 ohm  
Zout: 75 ohm  
Output:  
RCA:  
RCA (YPBPR):  
Y: 1 Vp-p, PB: 0.7 Vp-p, PR: 0.7 Vp-p  
Zout: 75 ohm  
CVBS: 1 Vp-p  
Audio interface  
Input:  
Audio interface  
Output:  
L1:  
RCA:  
Standard: 309 mVrms, FS: 2 Vrms at 1 kHz  
Zout: less than 1 k, Load: 10 k≠  
Optical Output connector  
(PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS)  
RCA:  
Standard: 309 mVrms, FS: 2 Vrms at 1 kHz  
Zin: 22 k≠  
Digital Audio:  
L2:  
RCA:  
Standard: 309 mVrms, FS: 2 Vrms at 1 kHz  
Zin: 22 k≠  
Video data  
Horizontal resolution: More than  
XP: 500 lines  
LP: 500 lines  
Signal to Noise Ratio: More than 45 dB  
Output:  
RCA:  
SP: 500 lines  
EP: 250 lines  
DVD:  
Standard: 309 mVrms, FS: 2 Vrms at 1 kHz  
Zout: less than 1 k, Load: 10 k≠  
Frequency Response: XP, SP: 0 dB 3 dB at 4 MHz (0 dB at 0.1 MHz),  
VHS:  
309 mVrms  
Zout: less than 1 k, Load: 10 k≠  
(Fine mode)  
LP, EP: 0 dB 3 dB at 2 MHz (0 dB at 0.1 MHz),  
(Fine mode)  
Tuner RF  
Tuner system/  
NTSC-M  
Audio data  
Dynamic Range:  
Channel coverage:  
VHF: 2 ch to 13 ch 75 ohm  
UHF: 14 ch to 69 ch 75 ohm  
CATV: 5A & A-5 ch to EEE ch 75 ohm  
One tuner (DVD and VCR common use)  
Provide 3ch or 4ch 75 ohm  
Rec/PB: more than 90 dB  
DVD-Video PB (with LPCM): more than 96 dB  
CD PB: more than 96 dB  
Frequency Response: XP, SP, LP, EP (6H mode): 20 Hz to 20 kHz (0 dB 3 dB)  
RF converter:  
EP (8H mode): 20 Hz to 12 kHz (0 dB 3 dB)  
e
Cross Talk:  
More than 60 dB at 1 kHz  
nc  
Dimensions  
Mass  
Approx. 430 mm (W)k89 mm (H)k352 mm (D)  
e
r
[Approx. 1615 16q (W)k39 16q (H)k137  
/ / /8q (D)]  
e
f
Approx. 5.8 kg (12.79 lbs.)  
LASER Specification  
Class 1 LASER Product  
Re  
Operating Temperature 5oC to 40oC (41oF to 104oF)  
Operating Humidity  
35% to 80% RH (no condensation)  
795 nm, 662 nm  
Wave Length:  
Laser Power:  
No hazardous radiation is emitted with safety  
protection  
Note  
Mass and dimensions shown are approximate.  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
75  
VQT0N92  
 
Index  
Progressive .............................................................. 15, 19, 41, 64  
Properties  
Channel  
adding, deleting ..........................................................................17  
Cleaning  
disc, lens, main unit ......................................................................8  
Clock setting ..................................................................................46  
Connection  
antenna, television......................................................................13  
cable TV box/satellite receiver....................................................14  
Quick Start................................................................................8, 43  
VCR Plus_ system  
Repeat play ................................................................................... 41  
Shorten (titles)............................................................................... 34  
Simultaneous recording and play.................................................. 27  
Audio  
attributes.....................................................................................40  
Chasing play..................................................................................27  
Create chapters ......................................................................22, 35  
Create playlists ..............................................................................36  
Enter Name  
One Touch Transfer (Dub) ............................................................ 59  
Remaining tape time ..................................................................... 55  
Repeat Playback ........................................................................... 50  
Scheduled recording ..................................................................... 52  
SQPB ............................................................................................ 50  
Tracking......................................................................................... 50  
VHS menu..................................................................................... 54  
VISS .............................................................................................. 54  
VP mode........................................................................................ 51  
disc .............................................................................................30  
Erase  
chapter........................................................................................35  
Flexible Recording.........................................................................26  
Language  
audio...........................................................................................43  
code list.......................................................................................45  
on-screen....................................................................................45  
sound track .................................................................................40  
subtitle .................................................................................40, 43  
Manual Transfer (Dubbing)............................................................58  
MP3 ...............................................................................................23  
MPEG-DNR ...................................................................................41  
One Touch Transfer (Dub).............................................................57  
76  
VQT0N92  
 
Español  
Cómo empezar  
Antes de conectar, apague todo equipo y lea las instrucciones correspondientes de funcionamiento.  
Referencia  
Las conexiones del equipo descritas sirven en concepto de ejemplo.  
Los equipos periféricos y los cables opcionales se venden por separado si no está indicado de otro modo.  
Conexión con un televisor y un VCR  
indica los accesorios incluidos.  
indica los accesorios no incluidos.  
Cable del  
televisor  
TV  
Antena al aire  
libre  
Conexión (sin cable audio/vídeo)  
Conecte por orden numérico de 1 a 3.  
La unidad envía una señal al televisor a través del cable  
AUDIO IN  
VHF/UHF  
RF IN  
coaxial de 75 en el canal 3 o 4. Es posible ver la  
imagen de vídeo en su televisor de la misma manera  
que la que ve en los programas TV.  
VIDEO IN  
R
L
Antena interior  
Después de esta conexión, ajuste el canal de salida  
RF “CH3” o “CH4” (l 78).  
Conexión (con cable audio/vídeo)  
Conecte por orden numérico de 1 a 4.  
Conecte por orden numérico, ajuste “OFF” del canal  
de salida RF (l 78).  
Cable de la antena  
Partidor  
Cable  
Audio/  
Vídeo  
4
75 cable coaxial  
1
1
2
2
RF IN  
Y
P
B
PR  
DVD/VHS COMMON OUT  
R - AUDIO - L  
VIDEO  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
(480p/480i)  
S
VIDEO  
OPTICAL  
R - AUDIO - L  
VIDEO  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
RF OUT  
R - AUDIO - L  
DVD OUT  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
VHF/UHF  
IN  
1
Al IN1  
75 cable coaxial  
3
3
Ventilador de  
refrigeración  
A la toma doméstica CA  
(CA 120 V, 60 Hz)  
Cable audio/vídeo  
Utilice un partidor si quiere también  
conectar la antena a su VCR.  
Rojo  
Grabadora de  
cassette de vídeo  
Cable de alimentación CA  
Sólo conecte a la toma de CA  
Blanco  
doméstica después de terminar todas  
las demás conexiones.  
R
L
VIDEO  
VHF/UHF  
RF IN  
Amarillo  
AUDIO OUT OUT  
Conexión al terminal S-VIDEO IN  
Sólo DVD  
Conexión a los terminales COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
Sólo DVD  
Terminal S-VIDEO OUT  
Terminal COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
El terminal S-VIDEO OUT hace conseguir una imagen más nítida  
que el terminal VIDEO OUT. (Los resultados reales dependen del  
televisor.)  
Estos terminales pueden ser usados para la salida sea entrelazada  
sea progresiva y para proporcionar una imagen más nítida que el  
terminal de S-VIDEO OUT.  
Conecte a los terminales del mismo color.  
TV  
(1) Terminales de entrada de audio (L/R)  
(2) Terminal de entrada S-Vídeo  
(3) Cable de audio (no suministrado)  
A Rojo (R)  
(1) Terminales de entrada componente  
(2) Terminales de entrada de audio (L/R)  
(3) Cable de vídeo del componente  
(no suministrado)  
(4) Cable de audio (no suministrado)  
A Rojo (R)  
TV  
(1)  
AUDIO IN  
(2)  
(1)  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
(2)  
VIDEO IN  
R
L
S VIDEO IN  
AUDIO IN  
R
L
B Blanco (L)  
(4) Cable S-Vídeo (no suministrado)  
(5) Panel trasero de la unidad  
(6) Terminales de salida de audio (L/R)  
(7) Terminal de salida S-Vídeo  
(3)  
(4)  
B Blanco (L)  
(4)  
(3)  
(5) Panel trasero de la unidad  
(6) Terminales COMPONENT VIDEO  
OUT  
P
R
COMMON OUT  
-
AUDIO  
-
VIDEO  
Y
P
B
PR  
ONENT VIDEO OUT  
(480p/480i)  
COMMON OUT  
-
AUDIO  
-
VIDEO  
R
-
AUDIO  
-
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
(480p/480i)  
(7) Terminales de salida de audio (L/R)  
AL  
R
AUD
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
(6)  
(6)  
DVD OUT  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
(5)  
(7)  
R
AUD
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
(7)  
DVD OUT  
(5)  
Cuando la unidad no ha de ser usada durante un largo tiempo  
Accionamiento rápido  
Para ahorrar energía, desenchúfela de la toma doméstica CA. Esta  
unidad consuma una pequeña cantidad de corriente aun cuando  
está apagada.  
Inicio rápido de 1 s. para grabar en el DVD-RAM°  
° A partir del estado de apagado, la grabación en el DVD-RAM  
l
inicia cerca de 1 segundo después de pulsar antes [Í, DVD/VHS  
POWER] y luego de pulsar secuencialmente [¥, REC] (Modo de  
Accionamiento rápido).  
ño  
Consumo de corriente en la espera  
pa  
s
E
Visualización frontal  
Automático  
Aprox. 9 W  
Aprox. 2 W  
Alta  
Act  
Aprox. 10 W  
Aprox. 4 W  
Accionamiento  
rápido  
Des  
77  
VQT0N92  
           
Cómo empezar  
Reproducción  
DVD  
Sintonización automática por enchufe  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
CH, W, X  
POWER  
Operaciones preliminares  
Í
Encienda el televisor y seleccione la entrada de vídeo  
correspondiente para conformar las conexiones a esta unidad.  
(Por ejemplo: la entrada AV, CH3 o CH4)  
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
TV/VIDEO  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
VHS  
DVD  
Si conecta la unidad a una caja del televisor de cable o a un receptor de  
satélite, sintonice su PBS local para que funcione el ajuste automático  
del reloj. Si no hay PBS local, ajuste el reloj manualmente (“Ajustar  
manualmente el reloj”).  
CH, W, X  
Teclas  
numéricas  
AUDIO  
Pulse [DVD].  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
CANCEL/RESET  
Select Language  
Seleccione la Lengua  
Sélection de Langue  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
[1] Pulse [Í, DVD/VHS POWER].  
[2] Pulse [CH, W, X] para seleccionar un  
número de canal de salida RF.  
SLOW/  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
English  
Español  
Français  
:, 9  
6, 5  
PLAY  
Conexión (sin cable audio/vídeo):  
Seleccione “CH3” o “CH4” que visualiza  
la pantalla a la derecha.  
Conexión (con cable audio/vídeo):  
Seleccione “OFF”.  
1
;
Press ENTER  
Pulse ENTER  
Appuyer sur ENTER  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
FUNCTIONS  
3, 4, 2, 1  
2;, ;1  
ENTER  
Visualización de la unidad  
Visualización de la unidad  
Cada vez que pulsa la tecla:  
CH 3 (ajuste predeterminado) ,. CH4 ,. OFF  
^------------------------------------------J  
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
S
RETURN  
SCHEDULE  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
JET REW  
[3] Utilice [3, 4] para seleccionar el idioma y pulse [ENTER].  
[4] Pulse [ENTER] para iniciar la sintonización automática por enchufe.  
Luego, la unidad procede al ajuste automático del reloj. El  
temporizador se visualiza cuando finaliza.  
SCHEDULE  
TIME SLIP  
REC  
REC MODE DVD ERASE ADD/DLT  
CREATE  
DVD ERASE  
VCR/TV  
CREATE CHAPTER  
¥
DUBBING  
VHS DVD  
VCR/TV  
CHAPTER  
REC MODE  
[5] Pulse [ENTER].  
IIntroducción de discos  
Si el reloj adelanta o atrasa una hora respecto a la hora actual  
[1] Pulse [  
Puede Ud. insertar un disco de cartucho o sin cartucho.  
[2] Pulse [  
<, OPEN/CLOSE] en la unidad principal para abrir la bandeja.  
Seleccione “j1” o “i1” en “Ajustar del huso horario” en el menú SETUP.  
Si la unidad no puede ajustar automáticamente el reloj  
Ajuste la hora manualmente. (“Ajustar manualmente el reloj”)  
<, OPEN/CLOSE] en la unidad principal para cerrar la bandeja.  
Al introducir un DVD-RAM con la lengüeta de protección de  
escritura ajuste a “PROTECT (PROTEGER)”, la reproducción  
comienza automáticamente.  
Ajustes del canal de guía para el sistema VCR Plus+  
Ajuste estos canales de guía de manera que se pueda usar el  
sistema VCR Plusi para la grabación temporizada. Antes de  
proceder a los ajustes, prepare el papel que muestra los canales, los  
nombres de las estaciones y los canales de guía.  
Nota  
Tiene que cargarse un disco de doble cara con el lado que quiere  
grabar/reproducir mirando hacia abajo.  
No es posible grabar continuamente de un lado de un disco de doble  
cara al otro. Es necesario que se expulse el disco y se lo revuelva.  
por ej.: Nombre de la  
Canal  
de guía  
Número  
del canal°°  
Ajuste del canal  
Innecesario  
estación  
°
CBS  
04  
04  
Cuando utiliza un DVD-RAM de 8 cm (3q) o DVD-R de 8 cm (3q),  
quite el disco del cartucho.  
Introduzca el canal 15  
sucesivo al canal de guía 33.  
HBO  
33  
15  
Disco sin cartucho  
Disco de cartucho  
Introduzca el canal 20  
sucesivo al canal de guía 38.  
(1)  
(2)  
Nickelodeon  
38  
20  
° Mire en los canales de guía para las estaciones en revistas.  
°° Apunte todas las estaciones que puede recibir.  
Si ha conectado una caja de televisor de cable o un receptor de  
satélite, el sistema VCR Plusi no funciona, así que no debe  
ajustar los canales de guía.  
DVD  
[1] Durante la parada  
(3)  
Pulse [FUNCTIONS].  
(1) Inserte etiqueta arriba.  
[2] Seleccione “Otras funciones” con  
[3  
,
4
]
y pulse [ENTER].  
(2) Insértelo completamente en su lugar hasta que haga un ruido seco.  
(3) Insertar el disco con la etiqueta hacia arriba y la flecha hacia el interior.  
[3] Seleccione “SETUP” con [3, 4] y pulse [ENTER].  
[4] Seleccione “Canal” con [3, 4] y pulse [2, 1].  
[5] Seleccione “VCR Plus  
r
Ajuste canal” con [  
3
,
4], luego pulse [ENTER].  
Reproducción de los discos  
[6] Utilice [3, 4] para seleccionar el canal de guía que quiere  
ajustar y pulse [1].  
Operaciones preliminares  
[7] Utilice [3, 4] para seleccionar el canal correspondiente al  
de guía y pulse [2].  
Encienda el televisor y seleccione la entrada de vídeo  
correspondiente para conformar las conexiones a esta unidad.  
Pulse [DVD].  
Para borrar un número, pulse [CANCEL/RESET, ¢].  
Repita los pasos 5 y 6 para introducir otros canales.  
[8] Pulse [ENTER].  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]  
[1] Pulse [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] para encender la unidad.  
Selección del tipo de televisor  
[2] Inserte un disco. (l arriba)  
No debe cambiar el ajuste cuando está conectado a un televisor que tiene el  
aspecto estándar de 4:3 y no es compatible con la salida progresiva.  
[3] Pulse [1, PLAY].  
La bandeja se cierra y comienza la reproducción.  
(La unidad emplea un tiempo para la adquisición de los datos  
del disco antes de comenzar la reproducción.)  
La reproducción inicia desde el último título grabado.  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [-RW‹VR›]  
[1] Durante la parada  
Pulse [FUNCTIONS].  
[2] Seleccione “Otras funciones” con  
[3  
,
4]  
y pulse [ENTER].  
[3] Seleccione “SETUP” con [3, 4] y pulse [ENTER].  
[4] Seleccione “Pantalla TV” con [3, 4] y pulse [2, 1].  
[5] Seleccione “Tipo TV” con [3, 4], luego pulse [ENTER].  
Aspecto 4:3/Aspecto 16:9:  
La reproducción inicia a partir del comienzo del disco.  
[DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]  
Televisor de aspecto  
estándar 4:3  
Televisor de pantalla  
panorámica 16:9  
Para detener la reproducción  
4:3  
16:9  
Pulse [, STOP]. (l 79, “Función de reanudación”)  
Cuando detiene la reproducción puede aparecer  
el salva pantalla a la derecha. Pulsando otra vez  
[, STOP] es posible utilizar el sintonizador de la  
unidad para ver la televisión.  
Salva pantalla  
480p/480i:  
Seleccione “480p” si el televisor es compatible con la salida progresiva.  
[6] Utilice [ ] para seleccionar el detalle, luego pulse [ENTER].  
3
,
4
Para volver a la pantalla anterior  
Pulse [RETURN].  
[DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]  
Para salir de la pantalla  
Para interrumpir provisionalmente la reproducción  
Pulse [RETURN].  
Pulse [;, PAUSE]. (Pulse nuevamente la tecla para reanudar la reproducción.)  
78  
VQT0N92  
DVD  
               
Reproducción  
DVD  
Cuando en el televisor aparece la pantalla de un menú  
[VCD]  
Pulse las teclas numéricas para seleccionar un detalle.  
Reproducción directa  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]  
Puede reproducir desde el título, capítulo o pista que selecciona.  
Durante la reproducción  
por ej.:  
[DVD-A] [DVD-V]  
“5”: [0] )[5]  
“15”: [1] )[5]  
Pulse las teclas numéricas para seleccionar el detalle.  
[CD] (Sólo disco MP3, JPEG y TIFF)  
Pulse [3, 4, 2, 1] para seleccionar un detalle, luego pulse  
[ENTER].  
por ej.: “5”: [0] )[5]  
“15”: [1] )[5]  
[DVD-A]  
“5”: [0] )[0] )[5]  
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]  
Algunas veces para seleccionar un detalle puede usar las teclas  
numéricas.  
Mientras que está visualizado el salva pantalla (l 78) puede ser  
Otros botones usados para hacer funcionar los menús  
Lea las instrucciones del disco para más información acerca del  
funcionamiento.  
especificado un número de grupo.  
por ej.: “5”: [5]  
Éste sólo funciona cuando está parada (está visualizado el salva  
pantalla) con algunos discos.  
Reproducir grupos adicionales  
Unos discos contienen grupos adicionales. Si aparece una pantalla  
de contraseña después de seleccionar un grupo, introduzca la  
contraseña con las teclas numéricas, luego pulse [ENTER]. Por lo  
que respecta a la contraseña, se refiera también a la envoltura del  
disco, etc.  
Nota  
Si aparece “ ” en el televisor, la unidad o el disco prohiben la  
operación.  
Vista rápida (Reproducción t1.3)  
[RAM]  
Puede ser aumentada la velocidad de  
reproducción sin distorsionar el audio.  
Durante la reproducción  
DVD-RAM  
Reproducir  
DVD-RAM  
Repr. x1.3  
Borrado de un título que se está reproduciendo  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
Pulse y mantenga [1, PLAY].  
Una vez borrado el título no puede ser restablecido. Asegúrese  
antes de proceder.  
[1] Durante la reproducción  
Para volver a la velocidad normal  
Pulse [1, PLAY].  
Continuación de la reproducción (Función de  
reanudación)  
Pulse [DVD ERASE].  
[2] Pulse [2] para seleccionar “Borrar” y pulse [ENTER].  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]  
Salto CM  
[1] Durante la reproducción  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [-RW‹VR›]  
Puede saltar por cerca de 1 minuto por cada vez que se pulsa.  
Durante la reproducción  
Pulse [, STOP].  
La reproducción se detiene y en el  
visualizador de la unidad destella “PB”.  
(Excepto cuando se reproduce desde el  
Direct Navigator y cuando se reproduce  
Pulse [CM SKIP].  
Visualización de la imagen TV como imagen en  
imagen/Selección de la cantidad de tiempo a saltar —  
Time Slip  
una lista de reproducción.) La unidad memoriza la posición.  
[2] Pulse [1, PLAY].  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [-RW‹VR›]  
La reproducción vuelve a comenzar de donde se interrumpió.  
Pulse [TIME SLIP] durante la reproducción y abajo a la derecha de  
la pantalla principal se va a visualizar la pantalla (imagen del  
televisor) del PIP (de imagen en imagen). Puede ver al mismo  
tiempo tanto la reproducción de imágenes como las imágenes del  
televisor. En la pantalla principal, puede también acceder  
inmediatamente a una escena que quiere ver especificando un  
cierto tiempo que quiere saltar.  
Para cancelar la función de reanudación  
Pulse varias veces [, STOP], “PB” desaparece en el visualizador  
de la unidad.  
(Esta función se cancela también cuando apaga la unidad o cuando  
está abierta la bandeja.)  
Avance rápido y rebobinado — SEARCH  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]  
Durante la reproducción  
[1] Durante la reproducción  
Reproducir  
(1)  
0 min  
Pulse [TIME SLIP].  
Aparece la pantalla PIP (imágenes del  
Pulse [6, SLOW/SEARCH] o [5, SLOW/SEARCH].  
televisor).  
Puede cambiar el canal que está  
Hay 5 velocidades de búsqueda. Cada vez que se  
pulsa la tecla la velocidad de búsqueda aumenta.  
Pulse [1, PLAY] para volver a iniciar la reproducción.  
Canal8  
DVD-RAM  
(2)  
t2  
Estéreo  
recibiendo pulsando [CH, W, X].  
Escuchará el audio de la reproducción  
de la pantalla principal.  
(1) Imágenes reproducidas  
(2) Imágenes actuales en  
Salto  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]  
Durante la reproducción o la pausa  
Pulse [:, SKIP] o [9, SKIP].  
Cada presión hace aumentar el número de saltos.  
[2] Mientras observa el indicador del  
Reproducir  
–5 min  
tiempo arriba a la derecha  
Pulse [3, 4] para ajustar el tiempo a  
saltar, luego pulse [ENTER].  
La reproducción salta por el tiempo  
que ha especificado.  
El indicador del tiempo se apagará a  
los 5 segundos aproximadamente, pero ajustando el tiempo  
volverá a encenderse.  
Pulse [3, 4] para cambiar por unidades de 1 minuto. Pulse y  
mantenga pulsado [3, 4] para cambiar por unidades de 10  
minutos.  
Canal8  
Reproducción de cámara lenta  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] (Sólo partes de imagen en movimiento)  
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]  
Durante la pausa  
Pulse [6, SLOW/SEARCH] o [5, SLOW/SEARCH].  
Cuando continúa la reproducción de cámara lenta durante cerca  
de 5 minutos, ella se detiene automáticamente  
(excluir [DVD-A] [DVD-V] [VCD]).  
Hay 5 velocidades de reproducción. Cada vez que se pulsa la tecla  
la velocidad de reproducción aumenta.  
Para despejar la pantalla PIP  
Pulse [TIME SLIP].  
Pulse [1, PLAY] para volver a iniciar la reproducción.  
[VCD] Sólo dirección en avance ([5, SLOW/SEARCH]).  
Referencia  
El fondo azul no aparece en la pantalla PIP.  
No puede cambiar el canal que está recibiendo mientras se está  
grabando la pantalla PIP.  
Visión cuadro por cuadro  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [DVD-A] (Sólo partes de imagen en movimiento)  
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]  
l
Crear capítulos  
[RAM]  
ño  
Durante la pausa  
pa  
Pulse [2;] ([2]) o [;1] ([1]).  
Durante la reproducción  
Pulse [CREATE CHAPTER].  
s
E
Cada vez que se pulsa aparece el cuadro siguiente o el anterior.  
Mantenga pulsado para cambiar sucesivamente hacia delante o  
hacia atrás.  
Pulse [1, PLAY] para volver a iniciar la reproducción.  
[VCD] Sólo dirección en avance ([;1], [1]).  
Pulse [:, SKIP] o [9, SKIP] para saltar al comienzo del  
capítulo  
.
No puede activar esta función cuando está ejecutando TIME SLIP  
(l 80) o envía (copia).  
79  
VQT0N92  
   
Grabación  
DVD  
Indicación del tiempo en que se parará la grabación  
Grabación de programas televisivos  
Durante la grabación  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
Pulse [¥, REC] para seleccionar el tiempo de grabación.  
En la unidad principal, pulse [¥, REC] en el DVD.  
Visualización de la unidad  
Puede grabar hasta 99 títulos en un disco (49 títulos [+R]).  
No es posible grabar emisiones digitales que permiten “Grabación  
sólo una vez” en discos DVD-R, DVD-RW, iR o DVD-RAM de 8  
cm (3q). Utilice un DVD-RAM compatible con CPRM.  
La grabación tendrá lugar en un espacio abierto en el disco. Los  
datos no se sobrescribirán.  
Cada vez que pulsa la tecla:  
Contador (suprimir) # OFF 0:30 # OFF 1:00 # OFF 1:30  
^------- OFF 4:00 ! OFF 3:00 ! OFF 2:00 !----------}  
Recepción de las transmisiones televisivas durante la grabación  
Si no queda espacio en el disco de grabación, será necesario  
borrar los títulos innecesarios (l 79) o utilizar un nuevo disco.  
Operaciones preliminares  
Conexión (sin cable audio/vídeo)  
Cuando graba en el DVD-R, DVD-RW (formato DVD-Vídeo) o +R  
Cuando graba programas MTS  
- Si no conecte una caja TV de cable  
Seleccione “Principal” o “Programa Audio Sec. (SAP)” en  
“Seleccionar MTS” en el menú SETUP.  
- Si conecte una caja TV de cable  
Seleccione “Main” or “SAP” en la caja TV de cable.  
La relación de aspecto de la imagen grabada será 4:3.  
A fin de reproducir en otra fuente de reproducción un DVD-R,  
DVD-RW (formato DVD-Vídeo) o +R grabado usando esta  
unidad, antes el disco ha de ser finalizado.  
- Asegúrese de que el indicador TV esté encendido en la  
visualización de la unidad. Por si no lo estuviese, pulse [VCR/TV]  
para encenderlo.  
Conexión (con cable audio/vídeo)  
- Pulse [TV/VIDEO] para cambiar el modo de entrada en “TV”.  
Pulse [CH,  
W
,
X] del televisor para seleccionar los canales TV deseados.  
Reproducción durante la grabación  
[RAM]  
Reproducción seguida  
Es posible empezar la reproducción desde el comienzo de un título  
mientras lo sigue grabando.  
Durante la grabación o la grabación temporizada  
Pulse [1, PLAY].  
Operaciones preliminares  
Quite la protección. [RAM]  
Seleccione un tipo de audio que quiere grabar.  
Pulse [DVD].  
La reproducción inicia mientras que procede la grabación.  
Grabación y reproducción simultáneas  
Puede reproducir un título grabado anteriormente mientras que está  
grabando otro título.  
[1] Pulse [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] para encender la  
unidad.  
[2] Inserte un disco. (l 78)  
[1] Durante la grabación o la grabación temporizada  
Cuando con esta unidad utiliza un DVD-RAM por la primera  
vez, formatéelo para garantizar una esmerada grabación.  
Pulse [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
[2] Utilice [3, 4, 2, 1] para seleccionar el título, luego pulse  
[ENTER].  
[3] Pulse [CH, W, X] para seleccionar el canal.  
Para seleccionar con las teclas numéricas:  
Modo Antena (Ondas hertzianas)  
La reproducción inicia mientras que procede la grabación.  
Para salir de la pantalla del Direct Navigator  
Pulse [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
por ej.:  
Modo Cable TV (Cable)  
por ej.: “5”: [0] )[0] )[5]  
“115”: [1] )[1] )[5]  
“5”: [0] )[5]  
“15”: [1] )[5]  
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]  
TIME SLIP  
Pulse [TIME SLIP] mientras que graba; la reproducción inicia a partir de  
30 segundos antes de aquel momento. Puede iniciar a reproducir incluso  
antes indicando en el específico indicador un cierto tiempo a saltar.  
[4] Pulse [REC MODE] para seleccionar el modo de  
grabación (XP, SP, LP o EP).  
[1] Durante la grabación o la grabación  
Reproducir  
0 min  
[5] Pulse [¥, REC] para iniciar la grabación.  
(1)  
temporizada  
No es posible cambiar de canal o el modo durante la grabación.  
Es posible cambiarlos cuando la grabación se encuentra en  
pausa, pero el material se grabará como un título separado.  
Pulse [TIME SLIP].  
Se visualiza la pantalla PIP (imágenes  
que se están grabando actualmente).  
En la pantalla principal, la  
Grabar  
(2)  
Para detener temporalmente la grabación  
Pulse [;, PAUSE]. (Pulse nuevamente la tecla para reanudar la  
grabación.)  
El título no puede dividirse en un título separado.  
Puede pulsar también [¥, REC] para reiniciar a grabar.  
reproducción inicia a partir de 30  
segundos antes de aquel momento.  
Escuchará el audio de la  
(1) Reproduce las  
imágenes  
(30 segundos antes)  
(2) Grabación actual  
reproducción.  
[2] Mientras observa el indicador del  
tiempo arriba a la derecha  
Pulse [3, 4] para ajustar el tiempo a  
saltar, luego pulse [ENTER].  
La reproducción salta por el tiempo  
que ha especificado.  
Para detener la grabación  
Pulse [, STOP].  
Grabado como 1 título hasta donde se detiene la posición.  
Una vez terminada la grabación, lleva más o menos 30 segundos  
para que la unidad complete la información de gestión de la  
grabación. [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
Reproducir  
–5 min  
Grabar  
El indicador del tiempo se apagará a  
los 5 segundos aproximadamente, pero ajustando el tiempo  
volverá a encenderse.  
Pulse [3, 4] para cambiar por unidades de 1 minuto. Pulse y  
mantenga pulsado [3, 4] para cambiar por unidades de 10  
minutos.  
Modos de grabación y tiempo aproximado de  
grabación  
(Unidad: hora)  
DVD-RAM  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
+R  
De un solo Doble lado  
Para visualizar completamente las imágenes de reproducción  
Pulse [TIME SLIP].  
Pulse [TIME SLIP] para volver a la pantalla PIP.  
lado  
(9,4 GB)  
(4,7 GB)  
(4,7 GB)  
XP (Alta calidad)  
SP (Normal)  
1
2
4
2
4
8
1
2
4
Referencia  
Según la escena, la imagen de la pantalla PIP puede resultar distorsionada  
o bien parpadear. Sin embargo, esto no afecta la imagen grabada.  
LP (Larga duración)  
muy larga duración)  
8 (6°)  
16 (12°)  
8 (6°)  
Para detener la reproducción y la grabación  
[1] Pulse [, STOP]. La reproducción se detiene.  
(Espere 2 segundos o más.)  
Según el contenido a ser grabado, los tiempos de grabación  
pueden salir más cortos que los señalados.  
[2] Pulse [, STOP]. La grabación se detiene.  
No es posible detener la grabación con [  
grabación temporizada. Para detener la grabación temporizada  
pulse [ , STOP], luego [ENTER] dentro de 5 segundos.  
- Puede también seguir pulsando [ ] en la unidad principal durante  
más de 3 segundos para detener la grabación temporizada.  
, STOP] durante la  
° Cuando en el menú SETUP se ha ajustado a “EP (6H)” el “Tiempo  
de grab. en el modo EP”.  
La calidad del sonido se baja, en comparación con otros modos  
de grabación, cuando se usa “EP (8H)”.  
80  
VQT0N92  
           
Grabación  
DVD  
Controle, cambie o borre el programa  
Aun cuando la unidad está apagada, puede visualizar la lista de la  
grabación temporizada pulsando [SCHEDULE].  
Grabación temporizada  
Puede introducir hasta 16 programas con un adelanto de un mes.  
Operaciones preliminares  
Quite la protección [RAM].  
Inserte un disco (l 78) y asegúrese de que haya bastante espacio  
vacío para grabarle encima.  
[1] Pulse [SCHEDULE].  
[2] Pulse [3, 4] para seleccionar el programa.  
Controle que el reloj esté ajustado a la hora correcta.  
Pulse [DVD].  
[3] Pulse [CANCEL/RESET, ¢] para eliminar,  
No es posible eliminar programas en fase de grabación.  
o pulse [ENTER] para cambiar.  
Uso del sistema VCR Plus+  
Se visualiza la pantalla de ajuste de la grabación temporizada.  
®
El introducir los números PlusCode es una manera sencilla de  
[4] Si pulsa [ENTER] en el paso 3,  
Utilice [3, 4, 2, 1] para cambiar luego pulse  
[ENTER].  
grabación temporizada. Puede encontrar estos códigos en las guías  
TV de los periódicos y revistas.  
Cuando conecte una caja TV de cable o un receptor de satélite, el  
sistema VCR Plusi no funciona. Programe la grabación  
temporizada manualmente (l abajo).  
[5] Pulse [RETURN].  
Referencia  
[1] Pulse [VCR Plus_].  
Los programas cuya grabación no tuvo éxito no se borran  
inmediatamente de la lista (destacados en gris), pero se borran  
automáticamente a las 4 de la mañana dos día después.  
Durante la grabación temporizada puede cambiar el tiempo final  
mientras el modo de grabación no es “FR”.  
[2] Pulse las teclas numéricas para introducir el  
número PlusCode.  
Pulse [2] para volver a la cifra correcta.  
[3] Pulse [ENTER].  
Cerciórese del programa y, si lo necesita, corrija usando [3,  
4, 2, 1]. (l abajo, paso 2)  
Precauciones al usar la grabación temporizada en  
DVD y VHS  
La grabación temporizada inicia automáticamente a la hora  
establecida.  
La grabación temporizada puede iniciar mientras la unidad está  
tanto apagada como encendida. Cuando la unidad está  
apagada, el sonido y el vídeo no salen en el televisor.  
[4] Si el programa es correcto  
Pulse [ENTER].  
“ ” se enciende en el visualizador de la unidad.  
Repita los pasos 1–4 para programar otras grabaciones.  
[5] Pulse [RETURN].  
La grabación temporizada de programas TV no puede  
ejecutarse en DVD y VHS conjuntamente.  
Verifique si el tiempo inicial de la grabación temporizada no se  
superpone en la pantalla de programación temporizada tanto del  
DVD (l arriba) como del VHS (l 83).  
Programación manual  
Cuando se conecte una caja TV de cable o un receptor de satélite,  
seleccione el canal en la caja TV de cable o receptor de satélite  
antes de que comience la grabación temporizada.  
Cuando se superponen los ajustes de la grabación temporizada:  
Cuando el tiempo inicial de las dos grabaciones temporizadas  
es el mismo, la del DVD tiene la prioridad.  
[1] Pulse [SCHEDULE].  
Cerciórese de que esté seleccionado “Nueva grabación  
programada”.  
Cuando están especificados los mismos canales del  
sintonizador en las grabaciones temporizadas tanto en el DVD  
como en el VHS, sólo puede iniciar una grabación temporizada.  
Cuando el intervalo entre la primera grabación temporizada y la  
segunda en el DVD es de 1 minuto o menos como señalado a  
continuación, la segunda grabación temporizada en el DVD  
tiene la prioridad sobre la en el VHS aunque su tiempo inicial  
sea posterior a la grabación temporizada del VHS.  
[2] Pulse [ENTER] para mover y cambiar los  
detalles usando [3, 4, 2, 1].  
Pueden usarse las teclas numéricas para introducir “Canal”,  
“Fecha”, “Act.” y “Des.”.  
Canal (Posición del programa/Nombre de la estación de TV)  
Fecha  
Puede crear usted un programa diario o semanal.  
Todos los programas diarios o semanales se cuentan como un  
solo programa.  
1 minuto  
Act. (hora de encendido)/Des. (hora final)  
Si mantiene pulsado el botón, el tiempo aumentará o  
disminuirá en incrementos de 30 minutos.  
Modo (Modo de grabación)  
DVD  
Canal 2  
Canal 4  
VHS  
Canal 10  
Para cambiar el modo de grabación, puede pulsar también  
[REC MODE].  
XP,.SP,.LP,.EP,.FR,.XP... (l 80)  
Nombre tít.  
Pulse [2, 1] para seleccionar “Nombre tít.” luego pulse  
[ENTER].  
Cuando los ajustes de la grabación temporizada de DVD y  
VHS se superponen, el del DVD tiene la prioridad.  
“ ” se enciende en la visualización de la unidad por los dos  
lados en el modo de espera. Cuando inicia la grabación, “  
por el lado de la grabación (lado DVD) queda encendido en  
tanto que el “ ” del otro lado (lado VHS) inicia a destellar.  
[3] Al terminar las correcciones pulse [ENTER].  
“ ” se enciende en el visualizador de la unidad.  
Para continuar programando:  
Seleccione “Nueva grabación programada” y repita los pasos  
2–3.  
[4] Pulse [RETURN].  
Para detener la grabación mientras un programa está  
trabajando  
Pulse [, STOP], luego [ENTER] dentro de 5 segundos.  
Puede también mantener pulsado [] en el DVD de la unidad  
principal durante 3 o más segundos para detener la grabación.  
l
ño  
pa  
s
E
81  
VQT0N92  
       
VHS  
Reproducción  
VHS  
Introducción de un cassette  
Cassette de vídeo  
de vídeo  
Haga disparar la lengüeta del  
cassette de vídeo para evitar un  
borrado accidental. Cubra el  
orificio con una doble capa de  
cinta adhesiva para cuando  
quiere usar el cassette de vídeo  
para una nueva grabación.  
La superficie en la que puede ver  
el rollo de la cinta tiene que mirar  
hacia arriba,  
Inserte un cassette de vídeo.  
Esta unidad se enciende  
automáticamente.  
Lengüeta  
Puede usar los cassettes de vídeo con las marcas VHS y S-VHS,  
pero esta unidad no permite disfrutar plenamente las  
características de los cassette de vídeo S-VHS.  
Para expulsar el cassette de vídeo  
Puede expulsar el cassette de vídeo cuando la unidad está en el  
modo de espera. Ésta vuelve en espera una vez que haya  
expulsado el cassette de vídeo.  
Por lo que respecta a la unidad principal  
Pulse [<, EJECT] en la unidad principal.  
Por lo que respecta al mando a distancia  
Pulse [VHS] luego mantenga pulsado [, STOP] durante 3  
segundos o más.  
Avance rápido/Rebobinado  
Durante la parada  
Pulse [6] (atrás)/[5] (en avance).  
DVD/VHS POWER  
TV  
POWER  
Í
VOLUME  
CH  
INPUT SELECT TV/VIDEO  
Localización progresiva/Rebobinado  
Durante la reproducción  
Dé un ligero golpe en o mantenga pulsado [6] (atrás)/[5]  
(en avance).  
Si mantiene pulsadas estas teclas, la normal reproducción vuelve a  
iniciar soltándolas.  
OPERATION  
SELECT  
DVD  
TRACKING/V-LOCK  
VHS  
VHS  
CH, W, X  
Teclas  
AUDIO  
numéricas  
Dé un golpecito en [1, PLAY] para volver a iniciar la normal reproducción.  
CANCEL/RESET  
VCR Plus+  
CM SKIP  
Búsqueda Jet  
Durante la reproducción  
SLOW/  
SKIP/INDEX  
REW SEARCH FF  
6, 5  
PLAY  
Dé un ligero golpe en [6] (atrás)/[5] (en avance) dos veces.  
Puede aumentar la localización progresiva/velocidad de  
búsqueda en rebobinado.  
Pulse [1, PLAY] para volver a iniciar la normal reproducción.  
Puede seleccionar la velocidad de búsqueda para ver la imagen  
grabada.  
La imagen grabada en el modo EP o VP puede resultar  
distorsionada si se reproduce a una velocidad aproximada de 35  
veces. Puede ocurrir un desplazamiento vertical. Esto no es un  
funcionamiento defectuoso pero si tiene lugar, cambie a una  
velocidad aproximada de 27 veces.  
La imagen podría ser incolora o podría resultar distorsionada  
según el televisor.  
1
;
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
FUNCTIONS  
VHS MENU  
3, 4, 2, 1  
ENTER  
SUB MENU  
RETURN  
TIME SLIP  
S
RETURN  
SCHEDULE  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
JET REW  
SCHEDULE  
6JET REW  
STATUS  
REC MODE  
REC  
REC MODE DVD ERASE ADD/DLT  
CREATE  
¥
DUBBING  
VCR/TV  
CHAPTER  
Lento  
Durante la reproducción  
Reproducción de un cassette de vídeo  
Pulse y mantenga [;, PAUSE] durante 2 segundos o más.  
Pulse [1, PLAY] para volver a iniciar la normal reproducción.  
Operaciones preliminares  
Seleccione el canal que ve la imgen de la unidad (por ejemplo la  
entrada AV) en el televisor.  
Rebobinado Jet  
Para ejecutar un rebobinado a una velocidad más rápida  
Pulse [6JET REW].  
La indicación “J. REW” aparece en la pantalla del televisor (salvo  
cuando aparece la indicación del tiempo que queda en la cinta).  
Según la cinta o la condición de funcionamiento, la velocidad de  
rebobinado puede variar un poco.  
Pulse [VHS].  
[1] Pulse [Í, DVD/VHS POWER] para encender la  
unidad.  
[2] Inserte un cassette de vídeo grabado. (l arriba)  
[3] Pulse [1, PLAY].  
El contador de la cinta se repone a “0:00.00” cuando la cinta se  
rebobina desde el comienzo.  
Según la cinta, esta función podría no obrar.  
La reproducción inicia automáticamente si inserta un cassette  
de vídeo al que se ha quitado su lengüeta.  
Cuasi reproducción S-VHS (SQPB)  
Para interrumpir provisionalmente la reproducción  
Pulse [;, PAUSE]. (Pulse nuevamente la tecla para reanudar la  
reproducción.)  
Es también posible reproducir cintas grabadas en el sistema S-VHS.  
Pueden tener lugar algunos ruidos según el tipo de cinta utilizada.  
No es posible conseguir plenamente una resolución más alta que  
la que es capaz el S-VHS.  
Para detener la reproducción  
Pulse [, STOP].  
No es posible grabar en el sistema S-VHS con esta unidad.  
Reproducción repetida  
Nota  
Cuando está apagada la unidad, un cassette de vídeo insertado  
puede ser reproducido pulsando [1, PLAY].  
Cuando la cinta llega al fin, esta unidad la rebobina  
automáticamente hasta el comienzo. Esta función no obra durante  
la grabación temporizada, el avance rápido y la grabación con  
La búsqueda Jet, la localización progresiva, el rebobinado o la  
reproducción lenta se quitan automáticamente a los 10 minutos, y  
la reproducción de imagen fija a los 5 minutos.  
Cuando ve una imagen fija o una reproducción lenta, la imagen  
que aparece en el modo VP puede resultar distorsionada.  
Cuando reproduce una cinta que fue grabada en otro VCR, puede  
ser necesario ajustar la pista. En algunos casos, la calidad de la  
imagen podría resultar todavía inferior. Esto se debe al formato  
limitado.  
Durante la reproducción o mientras que está detenida  
Mantenga pulsado [1, PLAY] durante 5 o más  
segundos.  
En el visualizador aparece la indicación “RP”.  
Al fin del programa, la cinta se rebobina hasta el  
comienzo del programa y lo va a reproducir otra vez  
(esto sólo funciona si quedan al menos 5 segundos  
de espacio en blanco al fin del programa). Esto se repite hasta que  
lo cancela.  
Para reiniciar la reproducción normal  
Pulse [1, PLAY].  
Para detener la reproducción  
Pulse [, STOP].  
82  
VQT0N92  
       
Grabación  
VHS  
Grabación de programas televisivos  
Operaciones preliminares  
Grabación temporizada  
Puede introducir hasta 16 programas con un adelanto de un mes.  
Seleccione el canal que ve la imgen de la unidad (por ejemplo la  
entrada AV) en el televisor.  
Controle que el reloj esté ajustado a la hora correcta. Por si no lo  
estuviese, ajústelo.  
Operaciones preliminares  
Seleccione el canal que ve la imgen de la unidad (por ejemplo la  
entrada AV) en el televisor.  
Controle que el reloj esté ajustado a la hora correcta. Por si no lo  
estuviese, ajústelo.  
Pulse [VHS].  
Inserte un cassette de vídeo que tenga la lengüeta de protección  
contra el borrado accidental intacta. (l 82)  
Pulse [VHS].  
[1] Inserte un cassette de vídeo que tenga la  
lengüeta de protección contra el borrado  
accidental intacta. (l 82)  
[2] Pulse [CH, W, X] para seleccionar un canal TV.  
Para seleccionar los canales con las teclas numéricas:  
Modo Antena (Ondas hertzianas)  
Uso del sistema VCR Plus+  
Se refiera a “Uso del sistema VCR Plus+”, paso 1–5. (l 81)  
Programación manual  
Cuando se conecte una caja TV de cable o un receptor de satélite,  
seleccione el canal en la caja TV de cable o receptor de satélite  
antes de que comience la grabación temporizada.  
por ej.,  
Modo Cable TV (Cable)  
por ej., “5”: [0] )[0] )[5]  
“115”: [1] )[1] )[5]  
“5”: [0] )[5]  
“15”: [1] )[5]  
“15”: [0] )[1] )[5]  
[1] Pulse [SCHEDULE].  
[3] Pulse [REC MODE] para seleccionar el modo de grabación.  
Cada vez que pulsa la tecla: SP>EP>VP>SP  
[4] Pulse [¥, REC] para iniciar la grabación.  
Cerciórese de que esté seleccionado “NUEVA GRABACIÓN  
PROGRAMADA”.  
[2] Pulse [ENTER] para mover y cambiar los  
Para detener temporalmente la grabación  
detalles usando [3, 4, 2, 1].  
Pulse [;, PAUSE]. (Pulse nuevamente la tecla para reanudar la grabación.)  
Pueden usarse las teclas numéricas para introducir “CA”.  
CA (Posición del programa/Nombre de la estación de TV)  
FECHA  
Para detener la grabación  
Pulse [, STOP].  
Puede crear Ud. un programa diario o semanal.  
ACT (hora de encendido)/DES (hora final)  
Si mantiene pulsado el botón, el tiempo aumentará o  
disminuirá en incrementos de 30 minutos.  
Modo de grabación  
Para cambiar el modo de grabación, puede pulsar también  
[REC MODE].  
Modos de grabación  
SP: Puede grabar la longitud señalada en la cinta.  
EP: Tres veces la longitud del modo SP.  
VP: Cinco veces la longitud del modo SP.  
Para conseguir una capacidad de grabación más larga,  
seleccione “EP” o “VP”.  
Si la calidad de la imagen es importante para Ud. o bien si quiere  
almacenar la cinta durante un largo período, seleccione “SP”.  
Esta unidad puede reproducir cintas grabadas con el modo LP en  
otro equipo (se enciende “LP” en el visualizador).  
Modo VP:  
SP,.EP,.VP,.A°,.SP... (l izquierda)  
° Modo SP/EP automático (l abajo)  
[3] Al terminar las correcciones pulse [ENTER].  
“ ” se enciende en el visualizador de la unidad.  
Para continuar programando:  
Seleccione “NUEVA GRABACIÓN PROGRAMADA” y repita  
los pasos 2–3.  
[4] Pulse [RETURN].  
“VP” destella en el visualizador de la unidad durante 8 segundos  
después de iniciar la grabación.  
Una cinta grabada en el modo VP por esta unidad no puede  
ser reproducida por otro modo VCR. Se recomienda que se la  
distingue de otra cinta indicando “VP” en su etiqueta, etc.  
Lleva más tiempo para que funcione la pista automática cuando  
se reproducen cintas en el modo VP y, en algunas cintas, podría  
no funcionar de ninguna manera. Si fuese el caso, haga la  
localización manualmente.  
Nota  
“ ” y “1” destellan cuando la unidad no puede ejecutar la  
grabación temporizada (por ejemplo, el cassette de vídeo no tiene  
la lengüeta de protección contra el borrado accidental o bien no  
hay ningún cassette de vídeo en su respectivo compartimiento).  
El tiempo real grabado podría alargarse más allá del programa mismo  
cuando los programas TV se graban usando el sistema VCR Plus  
Si ajusta “HL” (Tiempo de ahorro de la luz del día) a “Act” cuando  
ajusta manualmente el reloj, la grabación temporizada podría no  
funcionar cuando del verano cambia al invierno y viceversa.  
Nota  
Aunque el cassette que usa tenga la etiqueta “S-VHS”, no es  
posible grabar en el sistema S-VHS con esta unidad. Ésta se  
graba en el normal sistema VHS.  
No puede reproducir grabaciones VP en otro equipo.  
No puede cambiar canales mientras graba. Puede cambiar  
canales mientras está en el modo de pausa.  
Cuando la grabación está en pausa durante más de 5 minutos, la  
unidad vuelve al modo de parada.  
_
.
Para detener la grabación mientras un programa está trabajando  
Pulse [, STOP], luego [ENTER] dentro de 5 segundos.  
Puede también mantener pulsado [] en el VHS de la unidad  
principal durante 3 o más segundos para detener la grabación.  
Para visualizar el tiempo aproximado que queda en la cinta  
Modo SP/EP automático  
[1] Seleccione “SELECCIONAR CINTA” desde el menú VHS MENU  
y elija la longitud correspondiente de la cinta.  
[2] Pulse varias veces [STATUS].  
Si al comienzo de la grabación temporizada, no queda cinta  
bastante para terminarla, la función SP/EP hará marchar  
automáticamente la cinta a la velocidad EP para la grabación. Esto  
garantiza que será grabado el entero programa. Si el modo EP no es  
bastante para alargar la cinta para que se adapte al entero  
programa, no será posible grabar el entero programa TV.  
El visualizador cambia tan pronto como se pulsa cada vez [STATUS].  
Reloj ) Contador ) Tiempo que queda en la cinta  
^-------------------------------------------------------------}  
El tiempo que queda en la cinta podría no visualizarse  
correctamente según la cinta usada.  
Programación  
temporizada  
Primer programa  
(30 min.)  
Segundo programa (60 min.)  
Indicación del tiempo en que se parará la grabación  
Durante la grabación  
Pulse [¥, REC] para seleccionar el tiempo de grabación.  
En la unidad principal, pulse [¥, REC] por el lado del VHS.  
Visualización de la unidad  
(por ej.: cinta de 60 minutos)  
en EP  
15 min.  
en SP  
30 min. en SP  
No es posible activar automáticamente el modo VP.  
La longitud de la cinta ha de ser ajustada correctamente.  
Algunas cintas podrían no funcionar correctamente.  
Si cambia el modo de grabación de SP a EP durante la grabación  
temporizada, en aquel punto podría tener lugar una breve  
distorsión de la imagen.  
Cada vez que pulsa la tecla:  
Contador (suprimir) # OFF 0:30 # OFF 1:00 # OFF 1:30  
^------ OFF 4:00 ! OFF 3:00 ! OFF 2:00 !----------}  
l
ño  
Referencia  
pa  
s
E
Esto no funciona durante las grabaciones temporizadas.  
Pulsando [, STOP] la grabación se detiene y el horario  
configurado se borra.  
Controle, cambie o borre el programa  
Se refiera a “Controle, cambie o borre el programa”, paso 1–5. (l 81)  
Recepción de las transmisiones televisivas durante la  
grabación (l 80)  
Precauciones al usar la grabación temporizada en DVD y VHS (l 81)  
83  
VQT0N92  
               
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
VCR Plus+ and PlusCode are registered trademarks of Gemstar  
Development Corporation.  
The VCR Plus+ system is manufactured under license from  
Gemstar Development Corporation.  
“DTS” and “DTS 2.0iDigital Out” are trademarks of Digital  
Theater Systems, Inc.  
Pats. 5,307,173; 5,335,079; 4,908,713; 4,751,578; and 4,706,121  
Apparatus Claims of U.S. Patent Nos. 4,631,603, 4,577,216, and  
4,819,098, licensed for limited viewing uses only.  
MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from  
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is  
protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other  
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and  
other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology  
must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended  
for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise  
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or  
disassembly is prohibited.  
Panasonic Consumer Electronics  
Company, Division of Panasonic  
Corporation of North America  
One Panasonic Way Secaucus,  
New Jersey 07094  
Panasonic Puerto Rico, Inc.  
Ave. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5  
San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina,  
Puerto Rico 00985  
Panasonic Canada Inc.  
5770 Ambler Drive  
Mississauga, Ontario  
L4W 2T3  
VQT0N92  
C 2005 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.  
F0205Fa0  

Indesit Cooktop HHC7 7AB User Manual
JBL LSR6300 User Manual
Kalorik Team International Group Cooktop 31025 User Manual
KitchenAid KGCC506R User Manual 1
Konftel Conference Phone 300W User Manual
Marquis 9002MWD User Manual
Microsoft Computer Hardware P2289A User Manual
NEC MultiSync LCD1810 User Manual
Philips 107X User Manual
Philips SDW1400GN User Manual